7255 - Multifunction Printer KONICA MINOLTA - Free user manual and instructions

★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 8.5/10 📄 436 pages EN 💬 AI Question

USER MANUAL 7255 KONICA MINOLTA

Thank you very much for your purchase of the Konica 7255/7272. This Manual deals with making copies, correct handling of the machine, and precautions for safety. Please read before copying. In order to maintain a satisfactory copying performance, please keep this Manual readily available for reference in the side pocket of the machine. ENERGY STAR Program The ENERGY STAR Program has been established to encourage the widespread and voluntary use of energy-efficient technologies that reduce energy TA consumption and prevent pollution. As an ENERGY GT, STAR Partner, we have determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency grounding it on the following features. Auto Low Power This function conserves energy by lowering the set temperature of the fixing unit. In the standard setting, Auto Low Power operates automatically when 1 minute have elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time. The time period for the Auto Low Power function can be set for 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, or 240 minutes. See p. 2-21 for details. Automatic Shut-Off This function achieves further energy conservation by partially turning OFF the power supply, thereby reducing energy consumption to 20W or less. In the standard setting, Automatic Shut-Off follows Auto Low Power, operating automatically when 15 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time. The time period for the Automatic Shut-Off function can be set for 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes or 240 minutes. See p. 2-21 for details. Automatic Duplex Copying To reduce paper consumption, use this function to make double-sided (duplex) copies, automatically. We recommend that you utilize the Auto Low Power function, the Automatic Shut-Off function, and the Automatic Duplex Copying function. Copyright© 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All rights reserved.

Contents Contents Features of the Konica 7255/7272 Basic

Section 1: Safety Information

Caution Labels and Indicators Requirements for Safe Use . Power Source Environment Precautions for Routine Handling...

Section 2: Machine Information

Machine Configuration External Machine Items. Internal Machine ltems Standard/Optional Equipment. FS-110/FS-210 Finisher (+PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching Kit). 2-8 FS-111 Finisher 2-10 PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder. ee PZ-108/PZ-109 Punching / Z-Folding Uni 2-13 SF-101 Shift Tray… Control Panel Layout Basic Screen Turning On the Main Power Switch and Power Switch To Turn On the Power. To Turn Off the Power Reducing the Power in Standby Mode (Auto Low Power). Shutting Off Automatically (Auto Shut-Off) .…. Shutting Off / Reducing the Power Manually.…. Entering an EKC Password (EKC) Loading Paper Loading Paper in Tray 1 and 2 Loading Paper in Tray 3 and 4. Loading Paper in LCT (LT-402/LT-412) Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray . Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 3 or 4... Loading Tabbed Sheets in LCT (LT-402/LT-412).. Loading Tabbed Sheets in Multi-Sheet 1 Bypass Try Changing Paper Size of Tray 3 and 4 . ifornalol Machine Information

operators Job Mer Ep oc Trouble= shooting Machine ifications Advanced Information

Ofgnal Applications Network Function graine Maintenance & Supples

Contents (continued)

Section 3: Copying Operations

Positioning Originals Positioning Originals in Positioning Original on Platen Glass . Setting Print Quantity … To Set Print Quantity . To Change Print Quantity. Setting Job During Warm-up To Stop Scanning/Printing Selecting Paper Size To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS)... To Specify Desired Paper Size (AMS).. Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) To Copy in 1.00 Magnification Mode .… To Copy in Fixed Magnification Mode (RE). To Copy in Zoom Mode. Selecting Density Level To Select Copy Density. Density Shift... Making Double-Sided Copy (1-2, 2-2) . Using RADF Using Platen Glass. Making Single-Sided Copy from Double-Sided Originals (2-1) Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray) Copying Using Memory To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode) To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve)... To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen) Output Mode for Machine without Finisher . Output Mode for Machine with Finisher … Output Mode for Machine with Shift Tray Selecting Binding Mode Recalling Previous Job Settings . Checking Feature Selections and Proof Copying . Interrupt Copying

Section 4: Job Memory & Help Mode

Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall) . Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) To Display Help Screen from Basic Screen... To Display Help Screen from Other Screens.

Contents (continued)

Section 5: Troubleshooting

When “Call for Service” Message Is Displayed . Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble. Preventive Maintenance To Check the PM Counter Clearing Mishandled Paper …. When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) . When “ADD PAPER” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) .. 5-10 When “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow) 5-11 Memory Overflow in Current Job. a Memory Overflow in Reserve Job. When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed Troubleshooting Tips …

Section 6: Machine Specifications

Contents (continued) Advanced

Section 7: Advanced Information

Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) Rotation Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode . Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch&Fold) Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch) Output Z-Folded Copies (Z-Fold) Output Three-Folded Copies (Three-Fold) . Cover Sheet Feeding Using Finisher Manually Using Two Copiers in Tandem To Stop ScasnigPrning Troubleshooting …

Section 8: Special Original

Specifying Original Direction Selecting Original Binding Direction . Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/Photo Enhance) . Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original) Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form)

Section 9: Applications

To Display Application Selection Screen Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) . Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) . Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) Copying onto Transparent Films (OHP Interleave) . Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) … Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job) Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase) Reversing Colour in Black and White Image (Reverse Image) … Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode) Repeating Automatically Or Selecting Repeating Times(Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode) 9-36 Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure) ……. 9-39

Contents (continued)

Section 9: Applications (continued)

Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout) Printing Images Fully to the Edges (Full-Image Area) Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) … Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce8Shif) . Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) . Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) : Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) 9-61 Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory) ini 9-64

Section 10: Network Function

To Use Server Functions Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) To Store Image Data in HDD/PC............ To Transmit Image Data from HDD to PC To Delete Image Data from HDD/PC Storing Image Data While Copying (Image Store&Output) Recalling Image Data from HDD/PC (Image Recall) Editing Image Data Using PC (Image Edit) To Use Web Utilities … To Display Information on Machine To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status) . Operating Image Data Stored in HDD (HDD Job Information) . Setting E-Mail Transmission Function (Environment Setup) . Setting E.K.C. Function (Environment Setup) Setting Scan Transmission Function (Environment Setup) Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (Environment Setup) .

Section 11: Paper and Original Information

Trouble- shooting Machine ifications Advanced Information

Ofgnal Applications Network Function graine Maintenance & Supples

Contents (continued)

Section 12: Maintenance & Supplies

Adding Toner … Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into inisher Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-111 Finisher …. Empty Waste Basket of PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching Kit Empty Waste Basket of PZ-108/109 Punching / Z-Folding Unit . Cleaning Image Scanning Section … Cleaning the Document Glass. Cleaning the Left Partition Glass Cleaning the RADF Platen Guide Cover Checking Copy Count To Display the Counter List Screen To Print the Counter List. Copy Materials Maintenance Kit

Section 13: Key Operator Mode

How to Access the Key Operator Mode To Display the Key Operator Mode Screen. [1] System Initial Setting … [1] Date & Time Setting.. [2] Language Select Setting. [3] IP Address Setting.…… [4] E-Mail Transmission Setting … [2] Copier Initial Setting [3] User Setting Mode … [1] User Density Level 1 Setting. [2] User Density Level 2 Setting. [3] User Lens Mode Ratio Setting.. [4] E.K.C. (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting How to Access the EKC Setting Mode. [1] E.K.C. Data Edit... [2] E.K.C. All Count Reset [3] E.K.C. Function Setting … [5] Lock/Delete Job Memory [6] Paper Type / Special Size Set [7] Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment [8] Key Operator Data Setting

Contents (continued)

Section 13: Key Operator Modes (continued)

[9] Weekly Timer How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode [1] Weekly Timer On/Oîf Setting. [2] Timer Setting [3] Timer Action On/Off Setting [4] Lunch Hour Off Setting [5] Timer Interrupt Password Setting . [10] Control Panel Adjustment [11] Tray Auto Select Setting [12] Power Save Setting [13] Memory Switch Setting . [14] Machine Management List Print [15] Call Remote Centre [16] Side 2 Lens Adjustment [17] Finisher Adjustment [18] HDD Management Setting [19] Scan Transmission Setting . [20] Non-Image Area Erase Setting … [21] Background Adjustment [22] Timing Adjustment …. [23] Centring Adjustment Index vil internat Machine Information

Opsratlons Job Mer lp Hode Trouble- shooting Machine ifications Advanced Information

Ofgnal Maintenance & Supples

Features of the Konica 7255/7272 + AE - Automatic Exposure Automatically adjusts exposure to compensate for quality of the original. + AMS - Automatic Magnification Selection Automatically selects an appropriate magnification ratio when Paper Size is selected manually. Automatically selected when the AMS key is touched. + APS - Automatic Paper Selection Automatically selects copy paper size to match the original documents.

• ATS - Automatic Tray Switching Automatically switches tray to allow copying to continue without interruption if the selected tray empties while copying is in progress. + Auto Layout The original image on the platen glass or in the document feeder is copied and centred on a sheet. + Auto Low Power Automatically lowers the power after a specified period of copier inactivity. + Auto Reset Automatically resets to auto mode defaults after a specified period of copier inactivity. + Auto Shut-Off Automatically shuts off the main power after a specified period of copier inactivity. + Booklet Creates A5 or A4 booklets from A4 size originals in 1-2 or 2-2 copy mode. + Chapter Starts chapter pages on the right side (front pages) of the finished document. Only duplex mode (1-2) is compatible with this feature. + Combination Copies a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper to create a draft copy of a multi-page report at the same time as saving paper. + Copy Density Manually selects up to 9 density levels. + Copy Mode Selects the desired simplex mode (1-1 or 2-1); or duplex mode (1-2 or 2-2). viii

Features of the Konica 7255/7272 (continued) + Counter List Displays on the screen and prints the following data: total counter of the machine, copier counter, print counter and the date when the counter started. + Density Shift Shifts each of nine density levels in four density modes (Auto, Text, Photo, Increase Contrast) to three levels lighter or three levels darker. + Dual Page Copies both pages of an open book or book-size sheet separately onto two A4 sheets in 1-1 mode or separately onto each side of one A4 sheet in 1-2 mode. You can use the Dual Page mode with the Front or Front/Back cover mode. The cover page(s) will be scanned and copied normally before image division is performed on the other pages. + Frame/Fold Erasure Erases border and/or fold image area using Frame (1 - 300mm), Fold (1 - 99mm), or Frame & Fold. - Full-Image Area Makes copies printed completely to the edges of the paper to avoid image loss. + Image Insert Stores pages in memory from the platen glass, and inserts the pages into a document copied from the document feeder. + Image Shift Creates or removes a binding margin at the top, bottom, right and left edges (shift amount from 0 - 250mm, in mm increments); reduces image to prevent image loss (reduce & shift amount from 0 - 250mm, in 1mm increments). + Interrupt Copying Interrupts copying-in-progress to perform an urgent copy, using any of the copier features for the interrupt job. + Job Memory Programs up to 30 jobs and recalls each job by job number or name, as needed. All compatible platen glass functions can be programmed into Job Memory directly after they are selected. + Job Status Displays the Job Status Screen to view the current machine status, changes the operation order of reserve jobs, deletes the unused reserve job, or dis- plays the previous job list.

Features of the Konica 7255/7272 (continued) + Lens Mode (RE, Zoom) Selects fixed ratios, four reduction, four enlargement, and three user-set ratios. Zoom ratios can be selected from 25% - 400% in 1% increments. + Machine Status Confirmation Displays the current machine status on LCD for confirmation. + Manual Shut-off Shuts off the machine’s power when pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] on the control panel. + Mixed Original Copies mixed size originals from the document feeder in APS or AMS mode. APS automatically selects the paper size of each original. AMS mode allows you to select one paper size for all originals. + Network Function (option) When the machine is connected to a PC over a network, it uses a web browser on the PC to manage the stored data, to check the machine or job information, and to perform the Key Operator settings concerning the network environment. + Non-Image Area Erase When copying from the platen glass when the document cover is open, copies only the image area and not the exposed area of glass, which would otherwise copy as black. + Non STD Size for Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray Enters the special paper size to be loaded on the Multi-sheet bypass tray using the touch screen keypad in order to avoid paper misfeed. + Non STD Size for Original Identifies the special original size which the 7255/7272 cannot detect, in order to select the optimal paper size for copying or printing. + OHP Interleave When using transparency film, select either Blank or Copy Sheet Interleaving mode for each original. + Output Mode for FS-110/210 Finisher with PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder Installed: Cover Sheet mode Manual Finishing mode For details, see Section 7: Advanced Information.

Features of the Konica 7255/7272 (continued) + Output Mode for Machine with FS-110/111/210 Finisher Installed: Non-Sort, Sort, Staple-Sort, and Group modes using the primary (main) tray Non-Sort Face Down exit, Non-Sort Face Up exit, Group Face Down exit, and Group Face Up exit modes using the secondary (sub) tray Fold, Stitch & Fold, and Three-Fold modes using the booklet tray (FS-210 only) Selects an output tray and output mode on the Output Mode popup menu. + Output Mode for Machine with SF-101 Shift Tray Installed: Non-sort, Sort, and Group modes are available. Selects an output mode on the Output Mode popup menu. + Output Mode for Machine with no Finisher installed: Non-sort, Rotation sort, Group, and Rotation group modes are available in combination with Face down or Face up exit. Selects an output mode on the Output Mode popup menu. + Overlay Inprints a scanned image onto the copy image. + Overlay Memory Stores the overlaying image in HDD and prints a stored image onto the copy image. + Paper Capacity Total 3,600 sheets, including two 500-sheet trays, a 1,500 sheet tray, a 1,000 sheet tray, and a 100-sheet Multi-sheet bypass tray. Total 7,600 sheets, including 4,000-sheet optional large capacity tray. + Platen Memory Scans documents into memory from the platen glass and/or the document feeder and inserts the pages into another document copied from the document feeder. If an incompatible function is selected in this mode, the latter function will not be selected, and an Error message will be displayed. + Power Saver Automatically turns off all but nominal power supply after a specified period of copier inactivity, for optimal efficiency. Power is returned after a brief warm up period by pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] on the control panel. + Program Job Scans documents into memory while designating different copy conditions for each original, then prints all the documents collectively.

Features of the Konica 7255/7272 (continued) + Proof Copy To ensure correct output before running multiple copies, run a proof copy by pressing [PROOF COPY] on the control panel or touching PROOF COPY on the Check Screen. + Punch Mode for FS-110/210 Finisher with PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punch- ing Kit Installed: Punches four holes in output copies. PK-120 Type-A Punching kit punches four holes of the Swedish type. + Punch/Z-Fold Mode for FS-110/111/210 Finisher with PZ-108 Punching/Z- Folding Unit Installed: Punches four holes in output copies and Z-fold copied sheets.

• Punch/Z-Fold Mode for FS-110/111/210 Finisher with PZ-109 Punching/Z- Folding Unit Installed: Punches two or four holes in output copies and Z-fold copied sheets. + Repeat Selects the horizontal image area across the page, and repeats it down the page as many times as the repeat width setting (10 - 150mm) permits in manual or auto. + Reserve Scans in subsequent copy jobs while the 7255/7272 is busy printing or copying. + Reverse Image Reverses the image from black-on-white to white-on-black or vice versa. + Rotation Rotates the image before copying when the portraitlandscape orientation of the original is different from the orientation of the copy paper.

• Rotation Exit (Rotation Sort / Rotation Group) When no Finisher is installed, Rotation exit alternately switches the horizon- tal and vertical orientation of each sorted set as it outputs to the exit tray. Be sure to load both A4 and A4R in separate trays (including the Multi-sheet bypass tray) before selecting this feature. + Server Function (option) Stores image data in the HDD for future printing (or transmits the data to a PC over a network for editing and printing). + Sheet/Cover Insertion Inserts up to 30 blank or copied sheets from any tray including the Multi- sheet bypass tray, or inserts blank or copied front and back covers from any tray including the Multi-sheet bypass tray. xii

Features of the Konica 7255/7272 (continued) + Stamp Inprints a stamp, watermark, or scanned image onto the copy image. + Staple Selects the stapling position and number of staples. + STD Size (Special) Detects the standard paper sizes which cannot normally be detected when loaded in a main body tray or Multi-sheet bypass tray. - Tab Paper Copies onto tabbed sheets from tabbed originals, allowing the image on the tab part of the original to be printed on the same part of the tabbed copy paper.

• Tandem Mode for Two Copiers Works in tandem to distribute a large copying job in half the time of non-tan- dem mode. + Text/Photo Enhance Enhances photo image in Photo mode, regular image in Auto mode, text image in Text mode, lighter image in Increase Contrast mode. + Userset Density (USERSET 1, USERSET 2) Outputs up to 16 density samples on a total of 4 pages that display 4 samples per page, then programs the desired density under USERSET 1 and/or USERSET 2. + Weekly Timer Can be set according to the needs of each work environment. Turns main body power Off/On daily or weekly, during lunch time, on holidays, and also enables the Timer Interrupt mode, which allows temporary use of the machine even when the machine is in the daily, weekly, or holiday Off mode. + Wide Size Paper Copies onto paper slightly larger than the specified regular size.

• Z-Folded Original This feature sets the RADF to accept Z-folded originals. xiii

Features of the Konica 7255/7272 (continued) xiv

Features of the Konica 7255/7272 (continued) Xvi

Safe Infos SECTION Safety Information Precautions for Installation and Use Caution Labels and Indicators 1-2 Requirements for Safe Use 1-7

Caution Labels and Indicators The caution labels and indicators are attached to the machine areas, as shown below, where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid any dangerous situations or serious injury. A CAUTION

your finger into the two RADF hinge portions; otherwise you may AVE #2 A ACAUTION S |

AGE A\CAUTION À\ CAUTION The fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH. 1-2 A WARNING This area generates high voltage. If touched, electrical shock may occur. DO NOT TOUCH. Ë D 17 À CAUTION The conveyance fixing unit is heavy. Use care and draw it out gently; otherwise you may be injured. ZN CAUTION DO NOT put your hand between the main body and developing fixing unit; otherwise you may be injured.

Caution Labels and Indicators (continued)

The shift tray moves to and fro while printing. DO NOT put your hand in between the tray and tray supporting part; otherwise you may be injured. Also, DO NOT put your hand in the paper exit outlet while the tray is moving; otherwise you may be injured. =) (SF-101 Shift tray) \ ACAUTION

\ LAN ATTENZIONE DO NOT put your hand between the main body and tray; A CAUTIO N Es Z herwise you may be ured. DO NOT put your hand between the main body and tray; otherwise you may be (Main body tray 1 and 2) (Main body tray 3 and 4) AN CAUTION Burns or injury may occur from touching the areas detailed in the caution labels and caution indicators. Do not remove caution labels or indicators. If any caution label or caution indicator is soiled, please clean to make legible. If you cannot make them legible, or if the caution label or indicator is damaged, please contact your service representative. 1-3

Caution Labels and Indicators (continued) (Finisher with PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder only) ÂÀ CAUTION . DO NOT insert your finger into the bottom of the upper part of the feeder when returning to its original position; otherwise you may be injured. Fvonster pere EST) Carraone | ps || Laarremnen (FS-110/FS-210 Finisher) À CAUTION (ana ATTENTION FA PRECAUCION To avoid injury, DO NOT put your hand on top of the printed sheets. Be sure to hold both sides of the printed sheets when Pa them end DO ME RPRÉCRUGON removing them, an ÉRATTENZIONE NOT leave your hand on the printed sheets while the primary (main) tray goes up. (FS-210 Finisher only) À CAUTION J Inside the lower paper (FS-110/210 Finisher) exit outlet is the roller drive unit. DO NOT put À CAUTION an hand into it; ° otherwise you may be injured. Use care after opening the paper exit outlet. DO NOT put your hand into it; otherwise you may be injured.

Caution Labels and Indicators (continued) À CAUTION Use care after opening the paper exit outlet. DO NOT put your hand into onu een) p it; otherwise you may be injured. À CAUTION To avoid injury, DO [acariens [ec _ NOT put your hand fanrraren fran | MEN | on top of the jarnrauon(= rene printed sheets. (sos Lis 11 “ Be sure to hold both sides of the printed sheets when removing them, and DO NOT leave your hand on the printed sheets while the primary (main) tray goes up. (FS-111 Finisher) 1-5

Caution Labels and Indicators (continued) The following indicators are used on the caution labels or in this manual to categorize the level of safety cautions. À DANGER: Action highly liable to cause a death or serious injury. À WARNING: Action liable to cause a death or serious injury. AN CAUTION: Action liable to cause minor injury, medium trouble or physical ddamage. If you find any of these indicators when removing jammed paper, adding toner, or reading the manual, be sure to follow the information. (l) Please Be Reminded! Ifthe safety cautions in the manual become illegible due to soilage, etc., please arrange a new copy from your service representative. 1-6

Requirements for Safe Use To ensure your safe use of the machine, the following describes the precautions you are required to observe without fail for the power source of the machine and during installation and routine handling. Be sure to read and observe them. Power Source VAN CAUTION: Plug Socket

• À plug socket is limited in capacity. Use only a power source with the correct rating for the machine; otherwise, hazardous situations such as smoking or overheating may occur. See the following list to match the power supply and power consumption: a) 230V/50Hz: More than 10A b) 230V/60Hz: More than 10A + Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet. Do not use multiple outlet adaptors. À CAUTION: Power Plug and Lead + Be sure to insert the power plug firmly into the power socket. Otherwise an accident may occur as a result of smoking or overheating. If the inserted power plug is loose in the socket, even after it has been positively inserted, disconnect the plug and contact your electrical contractor. -+ For plug cable equipment, that the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. + Do not bend or crush the power lead. If your copier power lead is bent or damaged in any way, contact your service representative immediately. Do not attempt to repair it yourself, and do not continue to operate the copier. A damaged power lead may result in overheating, a short circuit, or fire. + Do not bundle or coil the power lead of the copier. Otherwise an accident may occur as a result of overheating or fire. + When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to observe the following precautions: a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket on the rear panel of the copier. Secure the cord with a fixture properly. b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by us. If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk of fire. 1-7

Requirements for Safe Use (continued) À CAUTION: Connecting Multiple Loads to One Socket Outlet Prohibited Never connect multiple loads to one socket outlet using a multi-outlet extension lead or branched socket. Otherwise an accident may occur as a result of overheating or fire. ÂÀ CAUTION: Extension Lead An extension lead must never be used with this machine. Environment À CAUTION: Prevention of Fire Do not install near flammable materials, curtains and volatile combustibles, that can catch or cause fire. À CAUTION: Prevention of Short Circuit Do not install the copier where it could be splashed with rain water, or water from a tap, to avoid a short circuit. À CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity + Keep away from direct sunlight, heat sources such as stoves, cool air from an air conditioner and hot air from a heater.

• Avoid any environment that is outside the range shown below: 10 to 30°C in temperature 10 to 80% in humidity À CAUTION: Ventilation + Maintain the installation place well-ventilated. + Keep away from dust or corrosive gases. These materials may cause poor image quality. - During the use of machine, the machine generates ozone but in an insufficient amount to cause any hazard to the human body. However, if the machine is used in a poorly ventilated room, many copies are made, or plural copiers are used at the same time, an odour may be detected. Ensure adequate ventilation for a comfortable working environment. À CAUTION: Vibration Do not install on a floor which is subject to vibration or is not level. 1-8

Requirements for Safe Use (continued) satety Information ÂÀ CAUTION: Transportation Be sure to contact your service representative when moving or transporting the machine. If you move the machine with the Hard disk drive or Memory unit installed, machine trouble may be caused by vibration. ÂÀ CAUTION: Installation Space Allow sufficient space for facilitating copy operation, changing parts, and periodic inspection. Especially leave an adequate space behind the machine to let hot air out from the rear fan. LL 475 650 400 +] 950 Konica 7255/7272 400 650 400 —l eo

) Please Be Reminded! SF-101 Shift tray gradually goes down while printed materials output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray on the left side of the Shift tray, as any interference may cause damage to the Shift tray. 1-9

Requirements for Safe Use (continued) Ë 202 j L Konica 7255/7272 + FS-110 Finisher + LT-402 Large capacity tray Unit: mm

È as j re Konica 7255/7272 + PZ-108/PZ-109 Punching / Z-Folding unit + FS-210 Finisher + PI110 Cover sheet feeder + LT-412 Large capacity tray () Please Be Reminded! SF-101 Shift tray gradually goes down while printed materials output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray on the left side of the Shift tray, as any interference may cause damage to the Shift tray. 1-11

Requirements for Safe Use (continued) Precautions for Routine Handling À WARNING: High Voltage DO NOT TOUCH the high voltage parts indicated with WARNING label or described in the manual. ÂÀ CAUTION: Actions in Response to Troubles + If the Service Call screen is displayed and copier operations cannot be continued any more, stop the operation to prevent any unexpected accident. Write down the report code as stated on the 2nd line of the message, then switch off the copier and disconnect from the power socket. Contact your service representative and inform them of the report code. + Do not touch the high temperature parts indicated with CAUTION labels or described in the manual. + Do not touch the inside of the machine for any other purpose than removing jammed paper or adding toner. + If machine repair is necessary, be sure to contact your service representa- tive. Never attempt to repair it by yourself. - If any abnormal sound, smell or smoke comes from the machine, immediately stop using it, tum off the power switch, disconnect the power plug and contact your service representative. + Ifthe breaker trips or the fuse blows, tum off the power switch, reset the breaker or the fuse, and turn on the machine. If the same situation occurs again, contact your service representative. + Insure the replacement fuse conforms with the rating of the power source. Never use a fuse with an incorrect rating. ÂÀ CAUTION: Prevention of Fire Do not use volatile combustibles such as a thinner or alcohol near the machine. ÂÀ CAUTION: Prohibition of Machine Modification Do not modify or remove any parts by yourself.

Requirements for Safe Use (continued À CAUTION: Prevention of Machine Troubles + Do not drop small metallic objects such as paper clips or staples inside the machine. + Do not place any heavy or hard objects such as a vase, books or ornaments on the machine. Q Q VAN CAUTION: Recommendation of Periodic Check Be sure to check periodically the following points: (1) The main lead or the power plug does not generate abnormal heat. (2) The power plug is not inserted loosely or the lead is not cut or scratched. (3) The earth wire is correctly connected. (4) The power plug or the power outlet is not covered with dust. If you find anything abnormal in the above items, stop using the machine and contact your service representative. À CAUTION: Toner

• Keep the toner cartridge away from children. The toner is nontoxic; however if you inhale or contact with eyes by accident, flush with water and seek medical advice. + Do not throw the empty toner cartridge into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation. ÂÀ CAUTION: Paper + Check paper to be sure it is according to specifications outlined in Section

+ Do not use stapled paper or paper that conducis electricity (silver, carbon, etc.), otherwise an accident may occur as a result of fire. - To avoid machine trouble, do not use heat-sensitive paper, coloured OHP film, or paper specifically designed for ink-jet printers, such as photo paper. À CAUTION: Power Saver and Weekly Timer + During Power Saver mode the copier is still connected to the mains power supply and power is still applied to certain areas of the machine. To avoid any unexpected troubles turn the power OFF when not using the copier for long periods of time. + When the Weekly Timer function is operating, turning power OFF will disable the function. 1-13

Requirements for Safe Use (continued) À CAUTION: Inside the Booklet Mode Outlet Inside the Booklet mode outlet is the roller drive unit. DO NOT put your hand into it, when removing the folded or stapled & folded sheet; otherwise you may be injured. À CAUTION: Finisher Paper Exit Outlet To avoid injury when stapling large size copies, DO NOT put your hand into the open Paper Exit Outlet. ÂÀ CAUTION: Fixing Unit The Fixing unit is internally very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH. Be careful when withdrawing the fixing unit. À WARNING: Drum Unit The drum unit has a high voltage generated. To avoid an electrical shock, DO NOT TOUCH. À CAUTION: Dispose of a Disused Copying Machine Do not dispose of this copier yourself. Contact your service representative, who can arrange for its safe disposal. If you change the place of installation, please contact your service representative. ÂÀ CAUTION: Paper Capacity for the Exit Tray The exit tray capacity is max. 100 sheets. If a copy run of more than 100 is required, be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. À CAUTION: Finisher Paper Capacity The FS-110/FS-111 Finisher is equipped with two exit trays, and FS-210 Finisher is equipped with three exit trays. Select an exit tray and output mode on the Output Mode popup menu. To prevent paper misfeed, do not exceed the paper capacity of the Finisher. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the capacity stated in Section 11, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. ÂÀ CAUTION: Finisher Primary (Main) Tray When printed materials are removed from the primary (main) tray of FS-110/ FS-111/FS-210 Finisher, the tray goes up automatically. To avoid injury, DO NOT put your hand on top of the printed sheets. Be sure to hold both sides of the printed sheets when removing them, and DO NOT leave your hand on the printed sheets while the primary tray goes up. 1-14

Requirements for Safe Use (continued) satety Information VAN CAUTION: SHIFT TRAY AND PAPER EXIT OUTLET + The shift tray moves to and fro while printing. Do not put your hand in between the tray and tray supporting part; otherwise you may be injured. + Do not put your hand in the paper exit outlet while the tray is moving; otherwise you may be injured. 1-15

SECTION Machine Information Machine Configuration, Turning On the Power and Loading Paper Machine Configuration. Turning On the Main Power Switch and Power Switch 2-18 Loading Paper ss 2-24 Changing Paper Size of Tray 3 and 4... 2-34 Machine Information Machine Configuration ‘Turm OnsOi the Power Loading Paper Changing Paper Size

Machine Configuration (continued) 1 RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds multiple originals one at a time to the platen glass for copying. 2 Toner access door opens to allow replenishing of toner. 3 Work table provides a convenient workspace for documents both before and aîfter copying. 4 Key counter (option) manages the number of copies made on the machine. 5 Multi-sheet bypass tray used for small quantity copying onto plain paper or special paper. 6 Right side door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper. 7 Tray 4 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets from A3 to A5. 8 Tray 3 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets from A3 to A5. 9 Tray 2is service-adjustable and holds 1,000 sheets of A4 or B5. 10 Tray 1 is service-adjustable and holds 1,500 sheets of A4 or B5. C2 avr Tray 1,2, 8, 4 and LCT are available for loading wide types of the regu- lar sizes specified above. 11 Front doors open to the internal copier to allow clearing of mishandled paper. 12 FS-110 Finisher (option) sorts, staple-sorts, and groups into finished sets. With PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching kit (option) installed, file holes can be punched in the output copies. With PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder (option) installed, cover sheet paper can be inserted in the output copies. 13 Sub power switch turns copier power On/Off when pressed. 14 LCD Touch screen displays interactive operation screens. 15 Control panel controls copier operations. 16 SF-101 Shift tray (option) sorts and groups into finished sets, and offsets each set upon exit. 17 Main power switch turns machine power On/Off to operate it as copier/ scanner/server/printer. 18 LCT (Large Capacity Tray LT-402) (option) holds 4,000 sheets. 19 FS-111 Finisher (option) sorts, staple-sorts, and groups into finished sets. 2-3 Machine Information Machine Configuration

Machine Configuration (continued 23 PI-110 Cover sheet feeder (option) 20 LT-412 Large capacity tray (option) 22 FS-210 Finisher = (option) \ 21 PZ-108/PZ-109 Punching/Z-folding unit (option) 20 LCT (Large capacity tray LT-412) (option) holds 4,000 sheets. 21 PZ-108/PZ-109 Punching / Z-Folding unit (option) punches file holes and/or Z-folds the output copies. 22 FS-210 Finisher (option) sorts, staple-sorts, and groups into finished sets, folds or staple & folds copies into booklet-styled sets, and also folds max. 8 copies in three. With PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching kit (option) installed, file holes can be punched in the output copies. 23 PI-110 Cover sheet feeder (option) loads cover sheet paper and feeds the sheet as cover.

Toner cartridge holds toner and is to be replaced when supplying toner. Toner cartridge holder lever can be pulled forward to withdraw the toner cartridge holder for replacing the toner cartridge. Conveyance/Fixing unit passes the paper through the drum unit, and fuses the toner onto the copy paper, and is to be withdrawn for removal of mishandled paper. Lever A can be moved to withdraw the conveyance fixing unit for removal of mishandled paper. Drum unit forms the copy image. Fixing unit fuses the toner onto the copy paper. Total counter indicates the total number of copies and prints made. 2-5 Machine Information Machine (Configuration

Del © © Q © TE FS-210 Finisher 7255/7272 main body LT-402 Large capacity tray = TN —_—_— T VE LT-412 Large capacity tray ä © [ PZ-108/PZ-109 Punching / Z-Folding unit FS-111 Finisher 2-6

Machine Configuration (continued) LT-402/LT-412 Large Capacity Tray

17 Rear stopper LT-412 Large capacity tra LCT top door opens to allow paper loading. LCT left side door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper. LCT lever can be moved downward to ease removal of mishandled paper. LCT paper guides hold copy paper to fix the position. Paper loading button is pressed to lower the bottom plate to allow loading paper. LCT bottom plate goes up automatically when paper supply becomes low, and goes down when the paper loading button is pressed. Rear stopper fixes the rear end of copy paper. 2-7

Machine Configuration (continued FS-110/FS-210 Finisher (+PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching Kit) 5 Secondary 5 Secondary (Sub) tray (Sub) tray 1 Finisher door 1 Finisher door 4 Primary 4 Primary (Main) tray (Main) tray à 3 Booklet tray 2 Booklet mode outlet {FS-210 Finisher only) {FS-210 Finisher only) FS-110 Finisher FS-210 Finisher 1 Finisher door opens to the internal Finisher to allow clearing mishandled paper, replenishing staples, and emptying waste basket of Punching kit. 2 Booklet mode outlet (FS-210 Finisher only) ejects finished copied sets when selecting Fold mode, Stitch & Fold mode, or Three-fold mode. 3 Booklet tray (FS-210 Finisher only) holds sets output in Fold mode, Stitch & Fold mode, or Three-fold mode. 4 Primary (Main) tray holds sets output in Non-sort mode, Sort mode (offset), Staple-sort mode, or Group mode (offset). 5 Secondary (Sub) tray holds sets output in Non-sort mode or Group mode with face down/up mode. 2-8

Machine Configuration (continued 4 Sub tray Machine conveyance lever Information Machine 3 Cover sheet RE conveyance lever ——2 PK-120/120 Type-A Punching kit (option) __- 1 Entrance lever À Ÿ5 Stacker conveyance lever 4 Subtray conveyance lever _-8 Cover sheet conveyance lever -2 PK-110 Punching kit (option) 1 Entrance lever 9 Waste basket 78 Stacker unit > KV I] —7 stacker unit | = knob / 4 6 Lower lever 10Carridge housing / (Le DA 11 Stacker unit handle FS-210 Finisher . with PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching kit 1 Entrance lever opens downward to remove mishandled paper. 2 PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching kit (option) punches file holes in the output copies. Cover sheet conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper. Sub tray conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper. Stacker conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper. Lower lever opens to remove mishandied paper. Stacker unit knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper from the Stacker unit. 8 Stacker unit folds or staples & folds copies into booklet-styled sets, and also folds max. 3 copies in three. 9 Waste basket holds waste paper punched out. 10 Cartridge housing holds staple cartridge and is to be replaced when supplying staples. 11 Stacker unit handle withdraws unit to allow removal of mishandled paper and replacement of staple cartridge. NO PB © 2-9

Machine Configuration (continued) FS-111 Finisher 4 Secondary (Sub) tray cover

3 Secondary _ / 1 Finisher door (Sub) tray — / 2 Primary (Main) tray 1 Finisher door opens to the internal Finisher to allow clearing mishandled paper and replenishing staples. 2 Primary (Main) tray holds sets output in Non-sort mode, Sort mode (offset), Staple-sort mode, or Group mode (offset). 3 Secondary (Sub) tray holds sets output in Non-sort mode or Group mode with face down/up mode. 4 Secondary (Sub) tray cover opens to allow clearing mishandied paper. 2-10

Machine Configuration (continued) 5 Upper lever Machine 1 Information 6 Upper knob te (Configuration 7 Right lever Turn OnO 10 Stacker unit handle my -8 Leftlever — 9 Stacker unit Q 10 Stacker unit handle 5 Upper lever opens upward to remove mishandled paper. 6 Upper knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper. 7 Right lever opens to remove mishandled paper. 8 Left lever opens to remove mishandled paper. 9 Stacker unit holds stapler.

0 Stacker unit handle withdraws unit to allow removal of mishandled paper and replacement of staple cartridge. 11 Cartridge housing holds staple cartridge and is to be replaced when supplying staples. 2-11

Machine Configuration (continued PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder 3 Upper tray guide plates 4 Upper tray 7 2 Upper unit release lever 5 Lower tray 6 Lower tray guide plates control panel © 1. Cover sheet feeder 1 Cover sheet feeder control panel controls cover sheet feeder operations. 2 Upper unit release lever can be moved to slide the upper unit of cover sheet feeder for removal of mishandled paper. 3 Upper tray guide plates hold cover sheets to fix the position. 4 Upper tray holds cover sheets for use in cover sheet output mode. 5 Lower tray holds cover sheets for use in cover sheet output mode or a copied set in manual staple/punch/hree-fold mode. 6 Lower tray guide plates hold cover sheets to fix the position. 2-12

Machine Configuration (continued) P2Z-108/PZ-109 Punching / Z-Folding Unit

> Waste basket | Punching / Z-Folding unit front door opens to allow removal of mishan- died paper or waste paper. Right lever opens to allow removal of mishandled paper. Knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper. Handle can be withdrawn to allow removal of mishandled paper. Left lever opens to allow removal of mishandled paper. Waste basket holds waste paper punched out. 2-13

Machine Configuration (continued) SF-101 Shift Tray 2 Top cover 1 Exittray

1 Exit tray holds sets output in Non-sort mode, Sort mode (offset), or Group mode (offset). 2 Top cover opens to allow clearing mishandled paper. 2-14

Machine Configuration (continued) Control Panel Layout CHECK HELP

Sub power switch turns copier power On/Off when pressed. LCD TOUCH SCREEN displays machine and copying status, help information, interactive screens, and touch keys for selecting all functions. CHECK displays a screen showing all settings that are selected for the current ob. MODE svwitches the machine operation mode to copy, scan/server, and print. HELP displays a screen with help for the currently selected function, or to access the Key Operator Mode Screen. KEYPAD enters numeric values. PROOF COPY outputs a single set of copies to confirm whether the current settings are selected properly. INTERRUPT stops copying in progress to allow copying from the platen glass. STOP stops the copying sequence; deletes the stored memory. 10 TIMER lights when the timer function is set. 11 POWER SAVER ON/OFF activates power-saving mode for times when the copier is inactive, or activates Timer Interrupt mode when Weekly Timer function is active. 12 START activates copying or scanning. 13 CLEAR QTY. allows resetting of print quantity. 14 [P] (counter) displays the Counter Screen or accesses programming modes for setting special functions. 15 JOB MEMORY displays screens for selecting job store/recall functions. 16 AUTO RESET restores copier to automatic mode settings or to Key Operator settings. HINT The control panel of this machine can be slightly lowered to ensure easy access by anyone, regardless of the physical or positional status of the operator. Your authorized service representative can make this setting for you. 245 DD NO UWR & Ni Machine Information Machine (Configuration

Machine Configuration (continued) Basic Screen The Basic Screen displays when copying operation becomes available after warm-Up. 10 STATUS key 1 Folder keys 6 Master/ Sub/ HDD/ Rotation/ 9 Memory indicator 2 Notice icons 4 Reserve job Original direction icons 8 Count/Set indicator R Message area 5 Original count 7 PAPER TYPE/SIZE key | M Position original in the RADF 4 face ue SÉRIE 5 0 ORIG T » [ann roner] Ÿ rmcauL 18 Copy mode area 16 Lens mode area 14 STORE key 19 Output mode keys 17 Copy density area 13 ROTATION OFF key 20 Output icon area 15 Paper size area 12 APPLICATION key 11 SPECIAL ORIGINAL key 1 Folder keys FREE JOB is selected to specify a copy job conditions. When scanning starts, FREE JOB changes to SCAN JOB, then changes to PRINT JOB when the machine starts printing. 2 Notice icons YAa00 Toner]: ADD TONER icon is displayed when toner supply becomes Oow. CF Pmeau | PM CALL icon is displayed when preventive maintenance is due. 3 Message area displays the machine status and procedure required at that time. Reserve job counts the reserve jobs already specified. 5 Original count counts the original pages placed in the document feeder as they are scanned.

6 A : Master icon is displayed when the TANDEM key is selected on the Output Mode popup menu. FE] : Sub icon is displayed when the copier operates in tandem with the primary (master) copier. 2-16

Machine Configuration (continued) : HDD icon is displayed when using Image Store & Output mode of Server function. Machine Information & : Rotation icon is displayed when Rotation automatically functions. RTE RARE KR Fa : Configuration Original direction icon indicates the original direction specified on the Special Original popup menu. 7 PAPER TYPESIZE key is touched to specify the type and size of the paper loaded in the Multi-sheet bypass tray. 8 Count/Set indicator indicates the print quantity entered from the control panel keypad, and also indicates the print count on the left of the set count while printing. 9 Memory indicator indicates the remaining memory available for the next operation. 10 STATUS key is touched to view the current job status, to change the printing order of reserve jobs, or to cancel printing a reserve job. 11 SPECIAL ORIGINAL key is touched to specify the condition of originals to be scanned. 12 APPLICATION key is touched to select various application functions. 13 ROTATION OFF key is touched to release the Rotation function. 14 STORE key is touched to store scanned images into memory. 15 Paper size area is used to select the desired paper size or APS. 16 Lens mode area is used to select the desired magnification ratio. 17 Copy density area is used to specify the desired exposure level. 18 Copy mode area is used to select the copy mode (1-1, 1-2, 2-1, or 2-2). 19 Output mode keys are used to specify the desired output mode. 20 Output icon area displays the appropriate output icon according to the selected output mode. 2-17

Turning On the Main Power Switch and Power Switch This machine is equipped with two power switches. To Turn On the Power

1. Turn ON the main power switch.

The main power switch is located on the rear left side of the main body. ( Please Be Reminded! When turning the main power switch OFF then ON, wait for 10 seconds or longer before tuning it ON again; otherwise the copier may not function normally.

2. Turn ONthe sub power switch.

The sub power switch is located on the far left side of the control panel.

3. The Wake-up Screen and Warm-up Screens will be displayed.

Please wait for a while 2-18

Turning On the Main Power Switch and Power Switch (continued) A few seconds after the Wake-up Screen appears in the LCD touch screen, seven types of Warm-up Screens will be displayed in succession for approx. 5 minutes (7255) / 6 minutes (7272). C2 HINT Setting reserve job is available while the machine is warming up. Touch the LCD screen to change the Warm-up Screen to the Basic Screen, then check that the message “Ready io copy reserve” is displayed on the Basic Screen. See p. 3-7 to p. 3-8. The Basic Screen will be displayed. The message on the Basic Screen will inform you that copying job is now available. Position original in the RADF

+ When the initial settings are changed by the Key Operator, the modified conditions will be displayed on the Basic Screen. + When “Enter E.K.C. password” is displayed, enter your password to use the machine. 2-19 Machine Information ‘Turm OnsOi the Power

Turning On the Main Power Switch and Power Switch (continued) To Turn Off the Power

1. Turn OFF the sub power switch.

The sub power switch is located on the far left side of the control panel. The touch screen and all the LEDs on the control panel will go out.

2. Turn OFF the main power switch.

The main power switch is located on the rear left side of the main body.

+ _ The main power switch is not required to be turned off usually. + When the machine is under control of the Weekly Timer function, turning off the main power switch will deactivate the function. 2-20

Turning On the Main Power Switch and Power Switch (continued) Reducing the Power in Standby Mode (Auto Low Power) This function automatically lowers the power after a specified period (initially 15 minutes) of copier inactivity. When activated, the LCD screen will go off. HINT The Auto Low Power function can be set to 5 minutes/ 10 minutes/ 15 minutes/ 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/240 minutes in the Key Operator mode. For the Key Operator setting, see p. 13-38. To start a copying job, press any key on the control panel. The Auto low power will be released and the LCD screen will be displayed.

+ _Ifthe Auto Shut-Off function activates at the same time, the power will be turned off . + The LCD screen will not go off during a duplex copying job or when the Jam Position Screen is displayed. Shutting Off Automatically (Auto Shut-Off) This function automatically shuts off the power after a specified period (initially 90 minutes) of copier inactivity. To start a copying job, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The copying operation will become available. C2 HINTS + The Auto shut-off can be set for 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240 minutes in the Key Opera- tor mode. For the Key Operator setting, see p. 13-38. + _ When ‘Timer interrupt mode / Enter password” is displayed after pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF, see p. 7-2 and follow the procedure to continue. 2-21

Turning On the Main Power Switch and Power Switch (continued) Shutting Off / Reducing the Power Manually Follow the procedure below to shut off the power manually. CZ Hinr The machine is initially set to activate the Manual Shut-Off function. The Manual Low Power can be selected in the Key Operator setting. See p. 13-39 to p. 13-46. Î1. Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer, then release it. Ù = ANTERAUPT

If the Manual Low Power is selected in the Key Operator setting, the machine automatically activates the Low Power mode before releasing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF].

2. The Shut-Off mode will be activated.

The [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] LED will be lit and all other LEDs and the LCD screen will be turned off.

Be sure to press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer, otherwise the following message will be displayed and the Shut-Off (Low Power) mode will not be activated. Press POWER SAVER more than one second, then release it for shut off mode Press POWER SAVER more than one second for low power mode To release the mode, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The machine will be available for copying operation. 2-22

Turning On the Main Power Switch and Power Switch (continued) Entering an EKC Password (EKC) The Electronic Key Counter (EKC) allows the Key Operator to monitor all sul s ee S ‘ ine copying activities by controlling EKC password accounts. Copy quantity Information limits for specific accounts can be set. The EKC is not factory-set. An EKC password is required only when the none EKC is activated; a User Password is assigned; and “Enter E.K.C. password” is displayed on the touch screen. Copying will be available by following procedure. CZ Hinr For details of the EKC setting, see p. 13-15 to p. 13-21. Î. Enter EKC password. Enter your 8-digit EKC password, using the keypad. CZ Hinr For setting an EKC password, see p. 13-17 to p. 13-19.

If an invalid EKC password is entered, continue by entering the correct password.

3. Starta copying job.

When the message changes to “Ready to copy”, copying job is available on the machine.

When your copy count reaches the copy limit, the message “Copy limit reached” will be displayed. In that case, contact the Key Operator to reset your copy limit.

4. Press [C] while pressing [P1.

The initial state will be restored, with the message “Enter E.K.C. password” displayed on the screen. 2-23

Loading Paper A paper indicator is shown on each tray key of the Basic Screen to indicate

When paper in a tray becomes empty, the indicator “4 appears on the tray key. son rise I the ER 0 nn) LdC) Cas | UTP UT ICO? MODE ICOEV DENE TILENS MODE. FUNCLION RADE. + (useser) 1. 00 F21d 21 LH) À AUS EE LS Go mn ES mic ES M = For 5 Li MS ES Follow the procedure below to supply the empty tray with copy paper. HINT When Thick or Thin is displayed on the tray key of the Basic Screen, be sure to load the specified paper; otherwise mishandled paper may occur. For details, see p. 13-23 to p. 13-24. When TABis displayed, see p. 2-31 for loading tabbed sheets. Loading Paper in Tray 1 and 2

1. Withdraw tray 1 or 2.

HINT See p. 2-2 to check positions of each tray. ( Please Be Reminded! Do not withdraw the tray forcibly; otherwise you may be injured.

2. Open the paper feed roller.

Loading Paper (continued

3. Place paper on the tray with the curl side turning up.

Load paper aligning it to the right side of the tray. Loading Paper ( Please Be Reminded! +_ Do not load above the limit indicated on the side guide plate. + Be sure that the rear guide plate is correctly positioned according to the paper size to be loaded; otherwise machine trouble may occur.

4. Pushinthe tray until it locks into place.

The indicator “4” on the tray key will change to ‘E: ÿ Please Be Reminded! Do not bump the tray into the main body; otherwise machine trouble may be caused. 2-25

Loading Paper (continued) Loading Paper in Tray 3 and 4

1. Withdraw tray 3 or 4.

HINT See p. 2-2 to check positions of each tray. (l) Please Be Reminded! Do not withdraw the tray forcibly; otherwise you may be injured.

2. Open the paper feed roller.

3. Place paper on the tray with the curl side turning up.

Load paper aligning it to the right side of the tray. qi Please Be Reminded! + _ Do not load above the limit indicated on the side guide plate. + Be sure that the rear guide plate is correctly positioned according to the paper size to be loaded; otherwise machine trouble may occur. 2-26

Loading Paper (continued)

4. While pressing the release knob, move the rear side guide plate

against the paper. Release the release knob to lock the side guide plate. () Please Be Reminded! Be sure that the side guide plates are securely aligned to the paper; otherwise the machine cannot detect the correct paper size, or copies may not be punched in position.

5. When paper is seated properly, close the paper feed roller.

6. Pushinthe tray until it locks into place.

The indicator “4” on the tray key will change to ‘E” ( Please Be Reminded! Do not bump the tray into the main body; otherwise machine trouble may be caused. 2-27 Machine Information Loading Paper

Loading Paper (continued) Loading Paper in LCT (LT-402/LT-412)

1. Open the LCT top door.

2. Pressthe paper loading button to lower the LCT bottom plate.

LT-402 LT-412 (y Please Be Reminded! Be sure that both main power switch and sub power switch are turned on before loading paper in the LCT. Without the power turned on, the LCT bottom plate will not function.

3. Load the paper into the LCT with the paper curl turning down-

ward, making sure it is the same size as LT-402 the tray has been set to. LT-412 () Please Be Reminded! Be sure to load only the paper size fixed for the LCT. To change the paper size of the LCT. tive. 2-28 , Contact your service representa-

Loading Paper (continued)

4. Repeat the steps 2 and 3 until the bottom plate will not go down

any more. LT-412 Information Loading Paper qi) Please Be Reminded! + _ Do not load above the red line on the side guide plates. + Be sure that the rear stopper is correctly positioned according to the paper size to be loaded; otherwise machine trouble may occur.

5. Close the LCT top door.

Loading Paper (continued Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray

1. Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray located on the right side of the

2. Load copy paper, and adjust the paper guides to the paper size.

The loaded paper size will be indicated on the bypass tray key of the Basic Screen. dl Please Be Reminded! Load OHP film or thin/thick paper one sheet at a time; or, stack paper, up to 100 sheets 80 g/m°?.

3. When copying is completed, close the Multi-sheet bypass tray.

VAN CAUTION Do not use stapled paper or paper that conducts electricity (sil- ver, carbon, etc.), otherwise an accident may occur as a result of fire. qi Please Be Reminded! To avoid machine trouble, do not use heat-sensitive paper, coloured OHP film, or paper specifically designed for ink-jet printers, such as photo paper. 2-30

Loading Paper (continued) Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 3 or 4 When TAB is displayed on the tray key of the Basic Screen, follow the pro- Fr cedure below to supply the tray with tabbed sheets. Information HINT The tray paper type can be specified in the Key Operator setting. For details, see p. 13-23 to p. 13-24. Loading Ç ) Paper FOR DETAILS + Service can set the tray 1 or 2 to have the tabbed sheets loaded. Contact your service representative, if desired. + The tab extension width should be 12.5 mm or less. Example: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set. 1stTAB Maragarent ï D x D) JP | he end TAB {= _ | 8rd TAB KZ ONE FINISHED SET. 2nd TAB 3rd TAB Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets. 1st TAB ne an, Mie. see, {- Printed 1 side = | 8rd TAB 1st TAB 2nd TAB 2nd TAB 3rd TAB THREE FINISHED SETS

1. Withdraw tray 3, or 4.

Open the paper feed roller. w ND , Position the rear guide plate according to the size of the tabbed sheets to be loaded. See p. 2-34 for details on positioning the rear guide plate.

4. Place the tabbed sheets on the tray as illustrated above.

5. While pressing the release knob, move the rear side guide plate

6. Closethe paper feed roller, then push in the tray until it locks into

Loading Paper (continued Loading Tabbed Sheets in LCT (LT-402/LT-412) Example: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set. 1stTAB 1st TAB Fan à nu Fnis 2nd TAB Printed _L 2nd TAB set L 3rd TAB 3rd TAB ONE FINISHED SET. Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets. 1st TAB 2nd TAB TSETAB on TAB Secten1 (octo 1 Section 1 Printed —@ "er set

+ The tab extension width should be 12.5mm or less. + To load the tabbed sheets into LCT, contact your service representative for positioning the rear stopper for the paper size to be loaded. Open the LCT top door. Press the paper loading button to lower the LCT bottom plate. Load the tabbed sheets into the LCT as illustrated above. Close the LCT top door.

Loading Paper (continued Loading Tabbed Sheets in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray Example: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set. Machine) LL Information 18 TAB 1stTAB san marre ) 2nd TAB Printed —> side

Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets. 1stTABS 1stTAB 2nd TAB 3 Secton 1 Sectin 1 Pt 2nd TABS

The tab extension width should be 12.5mm or less.

1. Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray located on the right side of the

2. Load tabbed sheets as illustrated above.

3. Adijust the paper guides to the paper size.

4. Specify the paper type as TAB for the Multi-sheet bypass tray.

HINT See p. 3-29 to p. 3-32 for specifying the paper type of the Multi-sheet bypass tray. 2-33

Changing Paper Size of Tray 3 and 4 The main body trays 3 and 4 are user-adjustable. Change the paper size of the tray according to the procedure below.

2-34 Withdraw the tray of the size to be changed. Open the paper feed roller. Remove the rear guide plate while pressing the knob, then insert it into the position designated for your desired paper size. The rear guide plate positions are marked on the tray base plate. dl) Please Be Reminded! Be sure to insert the rear guide plate into the position of the paper size to be set; otherwise machine trouble may occur. Stack paper, then move the rear side guide plate against the paper. Press the release knob to move the rear side guide plate, then release it to lock. Close the paper feed roller, then push in the tray until it locks into place. The tray key on the Basic Screen will indicate the paper size currently specified.

SECTION Copying Operations How to Make a Basic Copy Positioning Originals … Setting Print Quantity… Setting Job During Warm-up . To Stop Scanning/Printing Selecting Paper Size Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) Selecting Density Level... Making Double-Sided Copy (1-2, 2-2) Making Single-Sided Copy from Double-Sided Originals (2-1) Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray) Copying Using Memory 3-33 Output Mode for Machine without Finisher Output Mode for Machine with Finisher …. Output Mode for Machine with Shift Tray Selecting Binding Mode... Recalling Previous Job Settings … Checking Feature Selections and Proof Copying Interrupt Copying

Positioning Originals Positioning Originals in RADF The document feeder (RADF) automatically feeds up to 100 originals directly to the platen area, starting with the top sheet. The RADF should only be used for unstapled, smooth, flat originals. Positioning originals in Normal mode

1. Arrange originals in order.

() Please Be Reminded! + Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed fully. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, other- wise the selected copy conditions may be altered automatically. + Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 11-8 for details.

2. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.

Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP. Up to 100 originals can be set at a time. ( Please Be Reminded! + Do not set more than 100 originals or over the red line indicated on the paper guides; otherwise a paper misfeed will occur. + If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets, then load them from the block with the first page. See p. 3-33 to p. 3-34.

Positioning Originals (continued) Positioning originals in Mixed original mode Mixed size originals can be copied together from the document feeder. C2 miwr To use the Mixed original mode, see procedure on p. 8-8 to p. 8-9.

1. Arrange originals in order.

Copying : : se : Operations Arrange the mixed size originals as illustrated below. FETE Onginals” To the To the left depth e Setting direction ( Please Be Reminded! + Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed fully. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, other- wise the selected copy conditions may be altered automatically. + Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 11-8 for details. C2 miwr See p. 11-10 for available combinations of mixed originals.

2. Position mixed originals FACE UP, aligned with the left rear side of

the document feeder tray. Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP. Up to 100 originals can be set at a time.

Positioning Originals (continued) Positioning originals in Z-Folded original mode Z-Folded original mode detects the folded original size without using the size detection sensor of the RADF. CZ miwr To use the Z-Folded original mode, see procedure on p. 8-10 to p. 8-11.

1. Arrange originals in order.

2. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.

Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP. Up to 100 originals can be set at a time. ÿ Please Be Reminded! + Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed fully. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, other- wise the selected copy conditions may be altered automatically. + _Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 11-8 for details.

Positioning Originals (continued Positioning Original on Platen Glass Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document feeder, e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded, stapled, torn, or in generally poor condition. Î1. Raise the document feeder. Place original FACE DOWN in the left rear corner, aligning the edge with the left measuring guide.

2. Gently close the document feeder to prevent the original from

shifting on the glass. ÿ Please Be Reminded! When selecting Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, AUTO mode in Repeat, or AUTO Layout, DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder. For details on each function, see Section 9. À CAUTION Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly when thick original is placed and is under pressure of RADF; otherwise the glass may be broken and you may be injured. 3-5

opérations Positioning Originals

Setting Print Quantity This section describes how to set or change print quantity. To Set Print Quantity The copier is initially set to copy the original set in amounts determined by the print quantity setting, then outputs sorted sets.

1. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel. To Change Print Quantity Follow the procedure below to change the print quantity which has been already entered. Î1. Press [C (CLEAR QTY.)].

The quanitity displayed on the touch panel will return to 1.

2. Enterthe correct quantity.

Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel. 3-6

Setting Job During Warm-up While the copier is warming up after power is turned on, select copy conditions and start scanning so that the copier may start printing immediately the copier engine is ready.

1. Turmonthe main power and power switches of the machine.

A few seconds after the Wake-up Screen appears in the LCD touch panel, seven types of Warm-up Screen display in succession for approx. 5 minutes pente (7255) / 6 minutes (7272). Seting Print Quantity Set Job During Wamup

2. Touch the LCD panel to change the Warm-up Screen to the Basic

Screen. Check that the message “Ready to copy reserve” is displayed on the Basic Screen.

3. Set the desired copying conditions, and enter the print quantity.

CL nr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

4. Position original(s) FACE UP in the RADF or FACE DOWN on the

platen glass. C2 nr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

The original for the job will be scanned. 3-7

Setting Job During Warm-up (continued) When scanning is completed, the highlighted FREE JOB folder key will change to RESERVE JOB, and the next FREE JOB becomes active. Copier is warning up Ready to copy reserve/Select [FREE JOB] E RU crc

6. à setting more than one reserve job, touch the next FREE JOB to

highlight it. Ready to copy reserve ne) Repeat step 3to 5. Up to 10 reserve jobs can be prepared. Copying on the reserve job will start automatically after completing the warm- Up. CL mrs + To set the fourth reserve job, touch the arrow key on the far right in the Folder key area to display succeeding folder keys. See p. 3-35 - p. 3-37. + To stop printing, press [STOP]. See p. 8-9 for details. + The Job Status Screen allows you to alter the output order of the reserve jobs or to delete the reserve job. See p. 3-38 - p. 3-40. 3-8

To Stop Scanning/Printing Follow the procedure below to stop scanning or printing.

1. Touchto highlight SCAN JOB or PRINT JOB to be suspended.

Press START to restart ES" /1000 Copying Eco 1 cou poag 50 Operations

Set Job During Wamup Stop Scan/Prnt The current machine operation of the selected job will be suspended, and the popup menu will display on the Basic Screen to ask you to continue or cancel the job.

3. Touch EXITto cancel the job and delete the data, or CONTINUE to

complete the job. 3-9

Selecting Paper Size To select an appropriate paper size for getting your desired copy result, use APS (Automatic Paper Selection), or select paper size manually on the touch screen, as required. To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS) APS detects the size of originals placed on the RADF or platen glass and automatically selects and feeds copy paper of the same size, or selects an appropriate size according to the magnification ratio selected. C2 HINTS + See the table on the following page for the relation of original size, magnification ratio and copy paper size. + The initial settings may have been altered by Key Operator. See p. 13-10 to p. 13-11.

1. Touchto highlight APS at lower right corner of the Basic Screen.

Position original in the RADF face up APS is already highlighted when the initial settings are restored.

2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 avr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

4. Position original(s).

CL Hnrs + See p. 11-8 to p. 11-10 for paper sizes detectable from the RADF or on the platen glass. + See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals. + Key Operator can deactivate APS when original is set in the RADF or on the platen glass. See p. 13-39 to p. 13-46. 3-10

Selecting Paper Size (continued)

Scanned image will be printed on the paper size automatically selected.

+ _lfthe appropriate copy paper is not loaded in any tray, no copying will be performed, and a message will prompt you to load the appropriate Copying paper. Operations + Copy result may not be satisfactory due to the Rotation function. In this case, set the function OFF manually. See. p. 7-5. See the table below for the relation of original size, magnification ratio and copy paper size. Paper size Original size Paper size A3 | 84 | F4 | A4 ['A4R] 85 | 85R | A5 | A5R 025-042] B6R B6R 0.25 -0.42 Paper Size 043-0.50| A5R | 56R | B6r sen 0.43 - 0.50

Selecting Paper Size (continued) To Specify Desired Paper Size (AMS) When a paper size is specified on the touch screen, an appropriate reduc- tion or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically according to the original size detected from the RADF or the platen glass. HINTS + See the table on the following page for the relation of original size, copy paper size, and magnification ratio automatically selected. + Wide paper size can be specified when AMS is in use. In this case, the same magnification ratio as that of the standard size will be selected automatically. + _ If copying in 1.00 (100%) magnification mode with specifying a paper size is desired, see p. 3-14.

1. Toucha tray key on the Basic Screen to select the desired paper

size. Position original in the RADF ne) Selected tray key will be highlighted, and under the LENS MODE AS indi- cation will also be highlighted.

2. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 miwr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

4. Position original(s).

CL Hinrs + See p. 11-8 to p. 11-10 for paper sizes detectable from the RADF or on the platen glass. + See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

Scanned image will be printed on the specified paper size in the magnification ratio automatically selected. 3-12

Selecting Paper Size (continued)

Copy result may not be satisfactory due to the Rotation function. In this case, set the function OFF manually. See. p. 7-5. See the table below for the relation of original size, copy paper size, and magnification ratio automatically selected. Original size opsraons A3 | 64 | F4 | 44 | a4R | 85 | B5R | A5 | A5R A3 | 100 | 115 | 127 | 100 | 141 | 115 | 163 | 141 | 2.00 Bar | 086 | 100 | 1.10 | 0.86 | 1.22 | 100 | 1.41 | 122 | 173 g/A4 | 0.50 | 0.58 | 0.64 | 1.00 | 071 | 115 | 0.82 | 141 | 1.00 5| aan | 071 | 082 | 0.90 | 071 | 1.00 | 0.82 | 1.15 | 1.00 | 141 885 | 043 | 0:50 | 0.55 | 0.86 | 061 | 100 | 071 | 122 | 086 ©\Bsr | 061 | 071 | 078 | 061 | 0.86 | 071 | 1.00 | 0.86 | 1.22 A5 0.35 | 0.41 | 0.45 | 071 | 0.50 | 0.81 | 0.58 | 100 | 0.71 Fapeiten A5R | 0.50 | 0.58 | 0.64 | 0.50 | 071 | 0.58 | 0.81 | 0.71 | 1.00 3-13

Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) When the copier is turned ON, the magnification ratio is set to 1.00 (100%) automatically on the Basic Screen. Follow each procedure described in this section to select the desired magnification ratio. To Copy in 1.00 Magnification Mode Follow this procedure to make a 100% copy of the original image.

3-14 Close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. The initial settings are restored. Check that APS is highlighted to indicate that the 1.00 magnification is selected. HINT The initial settings may have been altered by Key Operator. See p. 13- 10 top. 13-11. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

Specifying paper size will release 1.00 magnification and set AMS automatically. In this case, touch 1:1 to highlight it again. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. C2 miwr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s). C2 avr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals. Press [START].

Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) (continued) To Copy in Fixed Magnification Mode (RE) Use the 8 preset ratios (0.50, 0.71, 0.82, 0.86, 1.15, 1.22, 1.41, 2.00) and 3 user preset ratios to increase or decrease magnification in fixed amounts. >>> Specification for Fixed Magnification Mode <<< Incompatible Conditions: AMS, Repeat mode in Repeat, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift opsraons Î1. Touch REonthe Basic Screen. SHENUT

Der Lens Mode The popup menu for selecting the desired preset/user preset ratio will be displayed. ÿ Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Select the desired magnification.

Touching any key on the popup menu will momenitarily highlight that key, then the popup menu will disappear automatically. The selected ratio will be displayed on the Basic Screen. Three user preset ratios are adjustable by the Key Operator. See p. 13-

3. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

4. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 nr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

5. Position original(s).

HINT See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) (continued) To Copy in Zoom Mode Use the Zoom mode to reduce or enlarge the copied original image in 1% increments. >>> Specification for Zoom Mode <<< Zoom range: 0.25 - 4.00 Incompatible Conditions: AMS, Repeat mode in Repeat, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift

1. Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen.

Position original in the RADF face up LENS l'ODE. [FT 00h Lu |

The popup menu for setting a zoom ratio will be displayed. () Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the desired magnification ratio in 3 digits, or use arrows (A / W) to scroll to the desired ratio. If an incorrect ratio is entered, continue by entering the correct 8-digit ratio.

4. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) (continued)

5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 miwr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

6. Position original(s).

opsralbn CT ar See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

Selecting Density Level Automatic Exposure (AË) operates with the default settings. lt detects the density of the original image and automatically selects the appropriate exposure for the copy. ABCD ABCD EFGH EFGH =) IJKLM er IJKLM NOPQ NOPQ RSTUV RSTUV WXYZ WXYZ Light original Normal Dark original To Select Copy Density Select manual copy density to adjust exposure (density) when originals are too light or too dark. Manual adjustments can be made in 9 levels on the Basic Screen.

Selecting Density Level (continued)

Select additional copy conditions, as desired. C1 mr See p. 13-12 to p. 13-13 to set the user-set density. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. > À Opérations C1 mr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s). C2 mr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals. Press [START]. Density. 3-19

Selecting Density Level (continued) Density Shift Use this function to shift each of nine density levels to three levels lighter or three levels darker. This function can be set to use in combination with each of AUTO (Text/Photo), Text, Photo and Increase Contrast modes other than the general mode. Density shift O_ mme Density shift 1 => Density shift 2_ =mÿ>

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed.

2. Select the desired mode.

scan originals (eg.) To set the Text mode, touch Text to highlight it.

3. Press [P (COUNTER).

The following message will be displayed. Density Shift (Text) 2 (0-5)

4. Press any key (from 0 to 5) using the keypad to determine the

Density shift. Entering 6 or above will be ignored.

5. Touch OKonthe Special Original popup menu.

Density shift in the selected enhance mode is determined. 3-20

Making Double-Sided Copy (1-2, 2-2) The Basic Screen is initially set to 1-1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from single-sided originals. Follow the procedure below to make double-sided copies from the originals scanned from the document feeder or from the platen glass. Using RADF opsraons Select the copy mode according to the original type (single-sided or double- sided). Front Front KE nn Double-sided original t Duplex copy Front Back Front Densiy Front Back Front en Front Back, — t Front Back t Front Back Duplex copy It Single-sided original

1. Touch 1-2 or 2-2 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.

original in the RADF amor A DOS Cu} (Q Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 3-21

Making Double-Sided Copy (1-2 2 2) (continued)

3-22 Check and specify the original set direction and binding mode. The Original direction icon is located at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen. To change the original set direction, touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu, then touch the desired original direction key to highlight it. Select condition Lo scan originals

If double-sided originals are upside down on the reverse side and you want to make single-sided copies of the same direction, touch TOP BIND. With this feature specified, next step is not needed. Proceed to step 4. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. Select the binding mode. Touch OUTPUT MODE on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch the desired binding mode key to highlight it. Output Mode popup menu with Finisher Select finisher mode OUTPUT

Making Double-Sided Copy (1-2 2) (continued)

Selecting TOP BIND will make copies upside down on the reverse side, while RIGHT&LEFT BIND copies normally. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.

4. Select additional copy conditions, as desired. one

Some incompatible conditions may automatically release the selected copy mode. In this case, arrange all the settings to be compatible with the selected copy mode.

5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 avr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

6. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder according to

the original direction specified in step 2. 14,22 HINTS + See p. 3-2 to p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds 100.

The machine starts to scan originals, then to print duplex copies when ready for output. Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 3-23

Making Double-Sided Copy (1-2 2) (continued) Using Platen Glass Use the platen glass to scan originals unsuitable for the document feeder. >>>Specification for Double-Sided Copying Using Platen Glass<<< OUse the Platen store mode. See p. 11-8 for the information on unsuitable RADF originals. incompatible Conditions: Face up exit using Secondary (sub) tray, Image Insert, OHP Interleave

1. Check and specify the original set direction and binding mode.

The Original direction icon is located at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen. To change the original set direction, touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu, then touch the desired original direction key to highlight it. If the originals are upside down on the reverse side and you want to make copies of the same direction on both sides, touch TOP BIND. With this feature specified, next step is not needed. Proceed to step 3. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.

Making Double-Sided Copy (1-2 2) (continued) Output Mode popup menu without Finisher Select finisher mode Copyint Operalons ROTATION = l'ounce. | SROUP

Selecting TOP BIND will make copies upside down on the reverse side, while RIGHT&LEFT BIND copies normally. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. CANCEL

3. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass according to the

original direction specified in step 1. Be sure to start from the first page. = HINTS See p. 11-8 for paper sizes detectable on the platen glass. + See p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals. + Use Non-Image Area Erase to prevent the black copy mark to be produced when scanning the original with the document feeder open. See p. 9-29 to p. 9-30. 14,22

4. Touch 1-2 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.

Making Double-Sided Copy (1-2 2 2) (continued)

5. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

Some incompatible conditions may automatically release the selected copy mode. In this case, arrange all the settings to be compatible with the selected copy mode.

6. Enterthe desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CL nr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

7. Press [START] to scan.

The front side image of the double-sided copy will be scanned into memory.

8. Replace the original on the platen glass with the back side image

Repeat this step until all originals are scanned. Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to check the remaining memory. To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP], then touch CANCEL on the popup menu to be sure the data is deleted.

10. Press [START] to print.

Allthe data in memory will be output. Press [STOP)] to suspend the printing job. AN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 3-26

Making Single-Sided Copy from Double-Sided Origi- nals (2-1) Use RADF and select 2-1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from double-sided originals. Front Front Back Front Front Back Conying nt —> Front Back Operations t Front Back Double-sided original t Front Back Simplex copy

1. Touch 2-1 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.

Position original in the RADF Face Up RreeRve ce 11,22

dl) Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Check and specify the original set direction and binding mode.

The Original direction icon is located at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen. To change the original set direction, touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu, then touch the desired original direction key to highlight it. Select condition Lo scan originals 3-27

Making Singl Sided Copy from Double-Sided Originals (2:1) (continued) 3-28 If double-sided originals are upside down on the reverse side and you want to make single-sided copies of the same direction, touch TOP BIND. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

Some incompatible conditions may automatically release the selected copy mode. In this case, arrange all the settings to be compatible with the selected copy mode. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. CL nr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder according to the original direction specified in step 2. CL mrs + See p. 3-2 to p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds 100. Press [START]. The machine starts to scan originals, then to print simplex copies when ready for output. Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. À CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray) Use the Multi-sheet bypass tray to copy using special (non-standard) paper. Specify the paper type and size to be loaded on the Multi-sheet bypass tray, as described below. C2 avr When loading special paper in the main body tray or in the LCT to use it on a regular basis, the paper type and size should be specified in the Key Operator setting. See p. 13-28 to p. 13-24.

1. Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray, and load the copy paper.

CL nr See p. 2-30 for further details.

2. Touch the Bypass key to highlight it.

Position original in the RADF É " "7" or) MEF

The PAPER TYPE/SIZE key will appear above the Bypass key. APS will be deselected, and AMS will be highlighted on the Basic Screen.

3. Touch PAPER TYPE/SIZE.

The Paper Type/Size popup menu will be displayed.

4. Touch the desired paper type key.

uma Papor Section {er Magniication) is" _ (A Che JS 7

When THICK, THIN, Tab paper, OHP, Trac'g, or User is highlighted, a print job will conform to the selected paper type. If no paper type indication is needed, touch the highlighted key to clear the selection in the TYPE area. The selection will be reflected on the Basic Screen when restored. 3-29

Copying Using Special Paper (Multi Sheet Bypass Tray) (continued)

When Tab paper is selected, AMS is automatically selected. In this case, STD size (special) and Non STD size cannot be selected, and the loaded copy paper cannot be fed in 1-2 or 2-2 copying.

5. Specify the paper size.

Please select paper type / size of Bypass tray When STD size (special) is highlighted, the popup menu will appear. Use arrow keys to scroll to the desired size. In this case, both the paper size and type selected will be indicated on the Basic Screen. Please select paper type / size of Bypass tray ER: l] ANPUT 52e)

Ca } When Non STD sizeis highlighted, the popup menu will appear. To set the vertical size, touch the vertical size key to highlight it, then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the vertical size, or use arrows to scroll to that number. To set the horizontal size, touch the horizontal size key to highlight it, then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the horizontal size, or use arrows to scroll to that number. In this case, the Special indication and paper type selected will be displayed on the Basic Screen, but the actual size information cannot be displayed. 3-30

Copying Using Special Paper (Multi Sheet Bypass Tray) (continued) Please select paper type / size of Bypass tray

Opératons Please select paper type / size of Bypass tray When Wide size paper is highlighted, the popup menu will appear. Use arrow keys to scroll to the desired wide size, then specify the precise dimensions of paper to be used, following the procedure below. (1) Touch Input size. The Input Size popup menu will appear. (2) Touch the vertical size key to highlight it. Use the keypad on the popup ser menu to enter the vertical size, or use arrow keys to scroll to that number. Bypass Tray The entered number should fall within the range from the vertical size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size, to a maximum of 314mm. (3) Similarly, touch the horizontal size key to highlight it, then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the horizontal size, or use arrow keys to scroll that number. The entered number should fall within the range from the horizontal size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size, to a maximum of 459mm. (4) Touch Select size to return to the Select Size popup menu. Touch Lead edge or Rear edge to select the image starting position. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. Select additional copy conditions, as desired. HINTS + See p. 8-12 to p. 8-13 for details on copying non-standard size or tab paper originals. + See p. 9-17 to p. 9-18 for details on copying onto OHP films. 3-31

Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray) (continued

8. Enterthe desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CL nr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

9. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. C2 avr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

When using A5 thick paper for copying, move the conveyance lever as shown below.

s ©. EE © When completed, retum the conveyance lever to its original position. 3-32

Copying Using Memory This section describes various copying features available on this machine using built-in memory. To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode) Store mode allows you to scan all the originals first, then to start continuous printing job. Use RADF store mode for scanning large amount of originals. Use Platen store mode for originals that cannot be fed through the document feeder due to thickness, size or condition.

RADF tray capacity is 100; however, more than 100 originals can be scanned into memory using RADF store mode. >>>Specification for Store Mode<<< incompatible with RADF store mode: Image Insert, Dual Page, Storing image in Overlay Memory incompatible with Platen store mode: Storing image in Overlay Memory

1. Make copying selections, as desired.

( Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch STORE on the Basic Screen to highlight it.

Position original in the RADF SPECIAL CAR nez LES

3. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 nr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. 3-33

Opératons Mutt-Sheet Bypass Tray Using Memory

Copying Using Memory (continued)

3-34 Position original(s). Using platen glass: Place original FACE DOWN. Start scanning from the first page. (l) Please Be Reminded! When Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, Auto detection mode of Repeat, or AUTO Layout is selected, keep the RADF open throughout the scanning procedure. Position originals FACE UP. If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the first page. CL nr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals. Press [START] to scan.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all originals are scanned. Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to check the remaining memory. To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP], then touch ÆEXIT on the confirmation screen to be sure the data is deleted. HINT Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your Konica service representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode. STORE will return to the normal display. Press [START]. All the data in memory will be output. Press [STOP)] to suspend the printing job. AN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Copying Using Memory (continued) To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve) The Reserve function allows you to set up a new job while a current (scan/ print) job is in process. When the current job is finished, the Reserve job starts printing immediately. >>>Specifications for Reserve<<< ] OJob settings: Max. 10 (current job plus 9 reserve jobs) opsraons OWhen the current job is under Store mode, Image Insert, or Dual Page, the reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to print the current job. incompatible Conditions: Interrupt copying, Scanning in Store mode, Proof copy, Storing image in Overlay Memory Î1. Press [START] to start scanning/printing for the current job. FREE JOB will become active to show that the reserve job setting is now available. Copying in progress Using Memory

2. Touch FREE JOB to highlight it.

The Reserve Job Setting Screen will be displayed. On the Reserve Job Setting Screen, all keys on the LCD and control panel will function for the reserve job.

3. Select copy conditions for the reserve job, as desired.

HINT When trouble occurs while setting the reserve job, the PRINT or SCAN JOB key on the Basic Screen will change to JAM or ADD PAPER key. See p. 5-8 to p. 5-10. 3-35

Copying Using Memory (continued

4. Position original(s) after completing the scan for the current job.

CL nr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

5. Press [START] to start scanning for the reserve job.

When setting more than one reserve job, the next reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to scan for the previous reserve job. When setting the fourth copying job, touch the active FREE JOB key at the far right to scroll to the next reserve setting screen. Another three reserve job settings (04-06) will be available. Copying in progress When setting the seventh copying job, touch the active FREE JOB key at the far right to scroll to the next reserve setting screen. Another four reserve job settings (07-10) will be available. Copying in progress 3-36

Copying Using Memory (continued When completed, the Basic Screen for the current printing job will be restored. To scroll to the next/previous screen, touch the arrow keys displayed at the right side of the folder keys. CZ avr When trouble occurs on a reserve job which is not currently displayed Copyi on the screen, the arrow key to scroll to that job will blink. See p. 5-8 to opérations p. 5-10. :

6. Copying of the reserve job will start automatically after completing

the current job. AN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 3-37

Copying Using Memory (continued) To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen) The Job Status Screen allows you to perform the following functions. + Confirm machine status -+ Change order of reserve job + Delete reserve job + View previous job list + View noncomplete job list + View tray information and machine status of the other machine in tandem mode.

1. Touch STATUS on the Basic Screen.

The Job Status Screen will be displayed. Check the current status of the machine.

2. Perform the desired setting on the screen.

CZ nr See the next page for details of the screen. To change the order of reserve job: Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch JOB PRIORITY. The highlighted reserve job is advanced by one in printing order unless the job preceding the selected one is already in progress. To clear reserve job: Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch JOB CLEAR. Touch YES to clear the highlighted reserve job, or NO to cancel. To check user name (not copier information): mo moe rames _jPifte CARE EEE Touch USER NAME CHECK to ne display the User Name Check ETES EVE O0 DOS MOTS tone Screen. re EE Check the user name indicated on the right side of the job number and operatio mode. Touch OK to return to the Job Status Screen. 3-38

Copying Using Memory (continued To display previous job list: i Touch PREVIOUS JOB LIST to EE” display the Previous Job List n En EE Screen. CII CET Touch {æ ) to scroll to the next page. Up to 16 previous jobs (4 pages) can be displayed. Touch (æ) to return to the previous page. Touch OK to return to the Job Status Screen. To display noncomplete job list: À Touch NONCOMPLETE JOB CE ME LIST to display the Noncomplete SR Job List Screen. TETE EE Touch {æ ) to scroll to the next page. Up to 16 noncomplete jobs (4 pages) can be displayed. Touch (æ ) to return to the previous page. Touch OK to return to the Job Status Screen. Touch OK on the Job Status Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. Contents of Job Status Screen NO. : Displays the No. (01-99) for each job assigned to the machine. MODE: Displays the machine’s current mode of operation. Three modes are listed below. COPIER PRINTER SCANNER STATUS: Displays the current status of the machine for each job. READY : Ready to use in each mode INTERRUPT : Interrupting the previous job ERROR : Error in each mode PRINTING : Printing in each mode NO PAPER : No paper in copy/print mode STOP : Stop in each mode RESERVE : Ready to reserve JAM : Jam in each mode TOTAL PAGE(s): Displays the number of scanned pages for each job. (0 to 9999) 3-39

Copying Using Memory (continued) PAGE(s) LEFT: Displays the remaining copy count of the job. 0 to 9999 (The number exceeding 9999 will be displayed as 9999.) Copy count = No. of scanned pages x Print quantity MINUTE(s) TO GO: Displays the time (in minutes) required for completing the job. Exceeding 999 minutes: 9991 Shorter than 1 minute: <1 Other: The following message will be displayed on the bar when the reserved job does not exist.

RESERVED JOB DOES NOT EXIST

TANDEM CONNECTED INFORMATION: Displays the tray information and current status of the other machine when two copiers are connected and operate in tandem mode. [Information] Paper size loaded in each tray Paper out indicator (when depeleted in the tray) Current status: OPERATING STOP PAPER SUPPLY JAM ERROR MEMGRY 100 TOUL PAGES MAUTEIS) | TANDEM CONNECTED. STATUS din 500 MAS REDMATION

Output Mode for Machine without Finisher This section describes the output modes for a copier without the Finisher. The Non-sort mode is initially selected.

Non-sort mode copies the original set in amounts determined by the print quantity setting, then outputs sorted sets normally. Rotation sort mode rotates every other sorted sets by 90° upon exit, provided the same paper size is loaded in two trays, one tray with paper loaded in portrait orientation and the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation, e.g., A4 and A4R. Group mode copies each original page in amounts determined by the print quantity setting, then outputs grouped sets normally. Rotation group mode rotates every other grouped set by 90° upon exit, provided the same paper size is loaded in two trays, one tray with paper loaded in portrait orientation and the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation, e.g., A4 and A4R. Using Face Up mode in combination with the above four modes, simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies exit face up on the exit tray.

operators Using Memory Output without Finisher

Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)

1. When using Rotation sort or Rotation group mode, load the same

paper size into two trays in different orientation. HINT Non-sort mode is initially selected. Key Operator can change the initial output mode. See p. 13-10.

2. Select the desired output mode.

To select Non-sort mode: Contirm that OUTPUT MENU and SORT are not highlighted on the Basic Screen. Position original in the RADF face up F as CUne [us ] To select Rotation sort mode: Confirm that OUTPUT MENU is not highlighted, then touch SORT to highlight it. To select Group, Rotation group, or Face up mode: (1) Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen. The Output Mode popup menu will be displayed. Select finisher mode

Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued) (3) Touch OK. The Basic Screen will be restored, with OUTPUT MENU highlighted.

3. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

4. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

Copying HINTS Grenier + See p. 11-8 to be sure that the exit tray capacity is not exceeded. Originals + See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

5. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE .,,.

DOWN on the platen glass. C2 avr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

6. Press [START]. ..

Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. 2 VAN CAUTION When the paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Q FOR DETAILS: Output Icons on the Basic Screen po Non-sort Rotation sort Group Rotation group OUTPUT OUTPUT Non-sort Rotaion sort Group Rotation group OUTPUT. OUTPUT. 3-43

Output Mode for Machine with Finisher Finisher FS-110/111/210 is equipped with a primary (main) and a secondary (sub) exit trays. Without using any optional equipment, each exit tray provides the output modes as described below. Primay (Main) Tray: 1 Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are not selected. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets. 2 Sort mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having each sorted set offset by 30 mm upon exit. 3 Staple-sort mode offsets and staples each sorted set. Up to 50 sheets or within 5 mm thick (FS-110/210) / 100 sheets or within 10 mm thick (FS-

111) can be stapled.

4 Group mode groups together multiple copies of each original and offsets the sets by 30 mm upon exit. n 2 Example: Make 3 copied sets from 4 original sheets

Cnonsort | [Son] [Supesot] 4 [ru | $ Ê é …/ } = = ÿ a = À =. 4 4 4 4 4 2stpes ? É Ta É 4 3 É $ £ 3 Ê É ñ a à L 1 ; à 4 L

Offset by 30mm 1 oblique staple Offset by 30mm 3-4

Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued Secondary (Sub) Tray: Face down non-sort exit outputs simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies face down, without offsetting the sorted sets. 2 Face down group exit outputs multiple copies of each original face down, without offsetting the grouped sets upon exit. 3 Face up non-sort exit outputs simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies face up, without offsetting the sorted sets. 4 Face up group exit outputs multiple copies of each original face up, without offsetting the grouped sets upon exit. F 2 Example: Make 3 copied sets T T T 1 Face down Face down Face up Face up non-sort group non-sort group The copier is initially set to output to Primary (main) tray in Sort mode. Follow the procedure on the next page to change the output mode, as desired. C2 avr See Section 7 for the output modes using Finisher options. >>>Specification for Output Modes with Finisher<<< Oincompatible with Sort mode: Using platen glass (unless Image Insert, Dual Page, or Platen store mode is used), Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, OHP Interleave incompatible with Staple-sort mode: Using platen glass (unless Image Insert, Dual Page, or Platen store mode is used), Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three- Fold, OHP Interleave () Please Be Reminded! Using excessively curled paper or some types of thin paper in Staple- sort mode may cause poor results in arrangement of the stapled sets. 3-45

Operalons Finisher Output Mode

Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued) Olincompatible with Group mode: 1-2 or 2-2 mode using platen glass (unless Platen store mode is used), Proof Copy, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Repeat Oincompatible with Group using Secondary (sub) tray: 1-2 or 2-2 mode using platen glass (unless Platen store mode is used), Proof Copy, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Punch, Cover sheet feeding, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Repeat Oincompatible with Face Up exit: 1-2 or 2-2 mode using platen glass, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Punch, Cover sheet feeding

1. Close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

C2 avr The Sort mode using Primay (main) tray is initially selected. Key Operator can change the initial output mode. See p. 13-10.

2. Select the desired output mode.

To set Non-sort or Sort mode using Primary (main) tray: proceed to the next step. To set Staple-sort mode using Primary (main) tray: proceed to step 4. To set Group mode using Primary (main) tray or output to Secondary (sub) tray: proceed to step 5.

3. To set Non-sort or Sort mode:

Check that SORTis already highlighted on the Basic Screen in initial condition. To select Non-sort mode, touch SORTto deselect it. Position original in the RADF Proceed to step 6. 3-46

Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued 4 Toset Staple-sort mode: (1) Touch STAPLE SORT on the Basic Screen to highlight it. Position original in the RADF face up opsralbn HERO The staple position icon will be displayed in the output icon area. (2) Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu. ct finisher mode EIRE BOT os) ALQAL COURT (3) Touch the desired staple position key, then touch OK. Ouputwinout The Basic Screen will be restored, with the selected staple position icon Fer displayed.

When making double-sided copies, select the desired binding mode on the Output Mode popup menu. See p. 3-53 for detail. Staple position Binding mode 3-47

Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued) (4) Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu. FONCTION SPECIAL (5) Touch the desired original set direction key, then touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. Proceed to step 6.

5. Toset Group mode or output to Secondary (sub) tray:

Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu. Select the desired output mode. To set the Group mode, touch GROUP to highlight it. Select finisher mode He] REY 0 To set the output to Secondary (sub) tray, touch SUB TRAY to display the popup menu, then touch to highlight the desired key(s).

Output Mode for Machine with Finisher (continued) Touch OK io restore the Basic Screen. OUTPUT MENU will be highlighted, and the output icon of the selected output mode will be displayed in the output icon area.

6. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HINT See p. 11-3 to be sure that the finisher capacity is not exceeded.

8. Position original(s).

CT avr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. VAN CAUTION When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 3-49

Operations Output without Finisher

Output Mode for Machine with Shift Tray This section describes output modes for a machine with Shift tray SF-101. + Non-sort mode outputs multiple copies of the original set. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets. + Sort mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having each sorted set offset by 30 mm upon exit. + Group mode groups together multiple copies of each original and offsets the sets by 30 mm upon exit. Example: Make 3 copied sets from 4 original sheets

Offset by 30mm EUR ETS ETS

Offset by 30mm The copier is initially set to output in Sort mode. Follow the procedure on the next page to change the output mode, as desired. >>>Specification for Output Modes with Shift Tray<<< incompatible with Sort mode: Using platen glass (unless Image Insert, Dual Page, or Platen store mode is used), OHP Interleave Olincompatible with Group mode: 1-2 or 2-2 mode using platen glass (unless Platen store mode is used), Proof Copy, Tandem Copying, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Repeat 3-50

Output Mode for Machine with Shift Tray (continued)

Close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. CL nr Key Operator can change the initial output mode. See p. 13-10. Select the desired output mode. Copying To set Non-sort or Sort mode: proceed to the next step. Operations To set Group mode: proceed to step 4. To set Non-sort or Sort mode: Check that SORTis already highlighted on the Basic Screen in initial condition. To select Non-sort mode, touch SORTto deselect it. ROTATION OFF,

OUTPUT Touch OK to restore the Basic Screen. OUTPUT MENU will be highlighted. Select additional copy conditions, as desired. 3-51

Output Mode for Machine with Shift Tray (continued)

6. Enterthe desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CL nr See p. 11-3 to be sure that the finisher capacity is not exceeded.

7. Position original(s).

C2 avr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. VAN CAUTION When the shift tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. TIP: Output Icons on the Basic Screen Non-sort Sort Group GUTPUT.

Selecting Binding Mode When copying in 1-2 or 2-2 mode, specify the binding mode on the Output Mode popup menu to obtain the desired copy result. Right & Left bind: Normal duplex copies Top bind: Duplex copies arranged upside down on the reverse side C2 enr If the originals are upside down on the reverse side and you want to Copying. make copies of the same direction or both sides, specify the original Operations, binding mode on the Special Original popup menu. See p.8-4 for details. Binding mode Copies RIGHT _— &LerrF |] CS BIND ARE : : [ 1 | [ 1 TOP [ | Bno 7]

2. Touch to highlight the desired binding mode key.

Select finisher mode He] snow | Shift Tray Output Mode Binding. Mode

Recalling Previous Job Settings Follow the procedure below to copy with a previous job's settings.

+ Only the last-completed output job settings can be recalled as the previous job settings. Non-complete job or reserve job settings cannot be recalled, even if the setting operations have been made last. + The previous job settings can be recalled, even after the machine power is turned off then on. Î1. Press [JOB MEMORY] on the control panel. The Job No. Selection Screen will be displayed.

The settings of the previous output job is recalled on the screen.

4. Change the settings recalled on the screen, if desired.

5. When all settings are acceptable, position original(s) in the

document feeder or on the platen glass, then press [START]. 3-54

Checking Feature Selections and Proof Copying Use the Check mode to confirm copying selections before starting print operation. In this mode, use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before making multiple copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the following copying selections. + Copying conditions using Store mode + Booklet + Sheet/Cover insertion * Image insert + Chapter + Dual page + Combination + Program job >>>Specifications for Check Mode and Proof Copy<<< OProof copy is available when using RADF, or Platen store mode for multiple originals. OProof copy cannot be used for testing the Userset density. OProof copy is unavailable with Group output mode. Î1. Select the desired copy conditions and enter the desired print quantity. (y Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Position original(s).

C2 nr See p. 3-2 to p. 8-5 for details on positioning originals.

3. Press [CHECK] on the control panel.

AUTO RESET. The Check Screen will be displayed. 3-55

Operations Recaling Previous Job (Check Mode & Proof Copy.

Checking Feature Selections and Proof Copying (continued)

Staple + Sort SANS) (EURE) COX) eur Verify the settings made for the current job. + When settings are OK, proceed to step 8. + When a set of sample copy is needed, proceed to step 6. + When making any setting change from the Check Screen, proceed to the next step. + When releasing any setting from the Check Screen, proceed to step 5. 4 To change the settings: Touch the desired copying condition key on the Check Screen to highlight it. Any key that cannot be highlighted indicates that the copying condition cannot be changed from the Check Screen. Touch CHANGE SETTING. The LCD will display an appropriate screen to change the copying condition selected.

+ Selecting a basic copying condition key will display the Basic Screen. + Selecting Enhance Mode, Special Orig., or Original key will display the Special Original popup menu. + Selecting an application function key will display the Change Application Selection Screen. When BOOK MARK has been checked on a subsequent screen, selecting the application function key will jump to that screen. See p. 9-2 for details. + CHANGE SETTING will not function for the following application functions, however they can be released by touching RELEASE SETTING: Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, AUTO Layout, Full-Image Area, Overlay. Change the setting as desired, then restore the Check Screen to return to the checking steps. From the Basic Screen, press [CHECK] to return to the Check Screen. From the Special Original popup menu or Change Application Selection Screen, touch OK to return to the Check Screen. + When making a set or sample copy, proceed to step 6. + To start printing without proofcopying, proceed to step 8. 3-56

Checking Feature Selections and Proof Copying (continued)

5. Torelease the settings:

Touch the desired copying condition key on the Check Screen to highlight it, then touch RELEASE SETTING.

opsralbn ES SRE) NE) CS) Cexr The confirmation screen will appear on the Check Screen. Touch YES to cancel the function, or NO to restore. + When making a set of sample copy, proceed to the next step. + _ To start printing without proofcopying, proceed to step 8.

6. Press [PROOF COPY] on the control panel or touch PROOF COPY

on the Check Screen. A set of sample copy will be output.

+_ Press [STOP)] to suspend the proof copying. In this case, the scanned image data will not be deleted from memory. + As to the copying conditions indicated on the keys that appear dimmed after proof copying, you cannot change or release the selection. SPECIAL ORIG. À <Sobing change is available PX6OpL ser0onod Roms ! Pain tray 1-1 (RADF) Photo Mode se Norma! ode

aps Staple + Sort Cover shest{Front/Eack) Es) (rte) CR) Ce EProo! Copy + When the copy result is satisfactory, proceed to the next step. + When any setting change is required, return to step 4, then repeat proof copying, as required. If the desired selection cannot be changed, press [STOP] to delete all the data in memory, then press [AUTO RESET] to restart the job setting. 3-57

Checking Feature Selections and Proof Copying (continued)

3-58 Change the print quantity, as required.

Proof copy can be performed as needed, until the print quantity amount on the Basic Screen reaches zero. (Note that the print quantity amount on the Check Screen does not change.) If required, change the print quantity on the Basic Screen. Press [START]. If the print quantity is not changed, the copier will output the rest, except the sample sets. À CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Interrupt Copying Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple job. When interrupt copying is completed, the settings for the initial job restore automatically and the Basic Screen displays. Interrupt copying is available when the copier is performing the following operations: + Continuously printing the image stored in memory + Scanning the originals into memory + Scanning the originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode C2 avr lf desired, Key Operator can change the timing to stop current machine operation for interrupt copying. Note that the compatible copying conditions vary according to the timing selected. See p. 13-39 to p. 13-46. >>>Specification for Interrupt Mode<<< OThe Interrupt mode cannot be selected with the following copier conditions: The Basic Screen is not displayed. Overlay Memory is in use. The Call for Service message displays or a paper misfeed occurs. Oincompatible: Reserve, Storing image in Overlay Memory Î1. Press [INTERRUPT] on the control panel. The [INTERRUPT] LED turns on and all JOB indicators on the Basic Screen change to INTERRUPT. Fr = Ji. } FRS C2 avr The timing to enter the Interrupt mode varies according to the job in progress on the machine when [INTERRUPT] is pressed. See the following page.

In Reserve mode, pressing [INTERRUPT] before the copier finishes scanning the reserve job originals clears the settings selected for the reserve job. For details of Reserve mode, see p. 3-35 to p. 3-56. 3-59

Opératons (Check Mode & Proof Copy Interrupt Mode

Interrupt Copying (continued)

3-60 Set copy conditions, as desired. The initial settings in Interrupt mode are as follows. Copy Mode :1-1 RADF : ON AE : ON Lens Mode : 1.00 (100%) APS : ON Print Quantity : 1 Finisher : Output to Secondary (Sub) tray

Remove any document from the platen glass or from the document feeder, if present. Position original(s). HINT See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals. Press [START] to start the interrupt copying.

When [CHECK] is pressed during Interrupt copying, the information displayed reflects the initial copy job settings. Check mode will not display Interrupt copy job information. When Interrupt copying is completed, press [INTERRUPT] again. The [/NTERRUPT] LED turns out and the INTERRUPT indicator on the Basic Screen returns to the JOB indicators. The settings of the initial job will be restored on the Basic Screen. Press [START] to resume copying. AN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Interrupt Copying (continued)

For particular jobs in progress, copying will cease only after certain phases of the immediate operation are completed, as indicated by the [UNTERRUPT] LED conditions described below. + Collectively printing image stored in memory The LED blinks until one set of the current job is printed. Copying Then the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Operations Interrupt mode. + _ Scanning originals into memory The LED blinks until scanning is completed for all originals placed in the document feeder. Then, the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode. + Scanning originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode The LED blinks until the copier completes the current printing job, scans all originals placed on the document feeder, and prints one set of the Reserved job. The LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode. Interrupt Mode 3-61

Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) Use Job Store to store up to 30 frequently used copy job settings, which can be recalled at any time. The stored jobs can be given alphabetical names. >>>Specifications for Job Memory<<< 9 AIl copying functions can be selected. 9interrupt mode cannot be used while in Job Memory.

1. Make job selections from the Basic Screen and/or Application

Selection Screen. ü Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Press [JOB MEMORY] on the control panel.

The Job No. Selection Screen will be displayed.

Job menory node Select_job_nunber AL creer The Job Store Check Screen will be displayed.

Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory Job Store) (continued)

4. Review the settings on the Job Store Check Screen.

Main tray 1-1 (RADF) Enhance Mode AUTO 4 Normal Mode 100 STD size 4P5 Non Sort Check that the selections made in step 1 are correctly entered. À FOR DETAILS If any correction is required, touch CANCEL io return to the Basic Screen. Make new selections, then restart the Job Store operation from step 2.

The Job No. Selection Screen will be restored.

To suspend the storing job after step 6, press [AUTO RESET]. Job Memory mode will be cancelled, and the Basic Screen will return from any screen.

6. Touch to highlight one of the keys numbered from 1-30 to store

the job under that number. Job store mode Locked job can't be overwritten PA Cfucecorronarn

Cons The screen displays 15 job number keys. The arrow key at the lower left cor- ner can be used to scroll to the next/previous page. A blank key indicates that no job is stored under that key, and a named job without a lock icon ( f) displayed can be overwritten. The key with a lock icon ( f) displayed is locked and cannot be selected. C2 avr To lock or unlock a job, and to delete a locked job, see p. 13-22.

Job Mer Ep oc Job Memory

Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) (continued)

If you wish to cancel the job number selection, touch CANCEL to restore the Basic Screen, which displays the settings made in step 1. If you wish to cancel the settings, press [AUTO RESET].

The Job Name Registration Screen will be displayed. Use max 16 characters to name job

Enter a job name in up to 16 characters, using the touch screen alphabet keypad. To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character entered, then enter the correct job name.

If you do not wish to enter a name, simply touch OK. The key displays 16 asterisks (*) in place of a name. When changing the name of a job previously stored, touch 1-CHAR- ACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete the previous name, then enter the new name.

The Job No. Selection Screen will be restored. Check that the job name has been correctly entered.

Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall) Use Job Recall to recall jobs that are already stored in Job Memory. Î1. Press [JOB MEMORY] on the control panel. The Job No. Selection Screen will be displayed.

2. Touch to highlight a job number key to select a job you want to

recall. Job menory node Select job number “à Cr faeecorronarn Job Mer Ep oc Job Memory

Cons The screen displays 15 job number keys. lf required, scroll to the next page with the arrow key to reach the desired job number key (16-30).

The settings of the selected job will be recalled on the restored Basic Screen. To cancel the recall mode, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen.

Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) The Help Screen provides you with the information about the current screen mode and about setting procedures. Help mode can be accessed from any screen except Job Memory and Key Operator Screens. Help mode provides two types of Help Screen according to the current screen mode: q Help Screen accessed from Basic Screen w Help Screen accessed from screens other than Basic Screen To Display Help Screen from Basic Screen Î1. Return to the Basic Screen, then press [HELP]. The Help Screen will be displayed.

2. Touch the desired key to display specific information.

FOR ASSISTANCE (PAPER supp1v} Ge) “enr j (PAPER suppiv} EE SOPPE SUPPLY TELEPHONE | runcn Es nncon (PAPER SUPPLY} TRIMMER PAPER suPr1Y| (PAPER SUPPLY) KEY OPERATOR MODE + STAPLE SUPPLY provides information on replacing staple cartridge. + PUNCH provides information on emptying trash basket. + RADF provides information on positioning originals in the document feeder. + TONER SUPPLY provides information on adding toner. + PAPER SUPPLY provides information on loading paper in each tray. + HELP MENU displays the Help Menu Screen which provides a list of all of the copier functions. When a function item is touched, the Help Screen displays information specific to that topic. C2 avr See the following page for details of the Help Menu Screen.

Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) (continued) + PANEL CONTRAST (_Q ] displays the screen to adjust the contrast of the LCD panel. + WEEKLY TIMER provides the current setting information of Weekly Timer. This key appears when the Weekly Timer function is turned ON. + FOR ASSISTANCE displays the extension number of the Key Operator. + TELEPHONE/FAX displays the phone/fax number of your service centre.

Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) (continued) To Display Help Screen from Other Screens

1. Whilein any screen other than the Basic Screen, press [HELPI].

The Help Screen displays to provide the information about the current screen mode and setting procedures.

The screen that was displayed before pressing [HELP] will be restored.

When “Call for Service” Message Is Displayed A “Call for Service” message indicates a machine condition that requires the attention of your service representative. The Call for Service Screen usually displays the telephone and facsimile numbers of your service representative. Please call service Report code 60-00

VAN CAUTION When the Call for Service Screen is displayed, be sure to con- tact your service representative immediately by following the procedure below.

1. Make note of the Report code No. indicated in the second line of

the message area. HINT In the event the machine with the Remote Diagnostics option is automatically monitored by your service representative, the Key Opera- tor can call for service using the Key Operator setting. See p. 13-48. (y Please Be Reminded! After calling for service using the Key Operator setting, be sure to turn OFF the sub power switch and main power switch immediately, then unplug the machine as described here.

2. Turn OFF the sub power switch and main power switch.

When “Call for Service” Message Is Displayed (continued)

3. Unplug the machine.

4. Contact your service representative and report the condition and

code No. Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble If the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service Screen, you may continue operating the copier on a limited function basis and utilize the trays and ADU that are not affected by the trouble. To obtain this limited functionality of the copier, consult your service representative. Be sure to utilize the limited function only temporarily, and arrange for machine repair immediately. Trouble- shooting

1. _Ifthe limited use of the copier is available, the following message Series

is displayed in the message area instead of the Report code. ex. | Tray 2 failure Press AUTO to select except this tray

2. Press [AUTO RESET].

Please switch ON/OFF E 18-2 Make note of the Report code No.

3. Turn OFF then ON the power switch.

A copying job can be continued without using the troubled portion of the machine (ex. Tray 2). AN CAUTION EVEN IF THE COPYING JOB CAN BE CONTINUED WITH THE ABOVE OPERATION, BE SURE TO CONTACT YOUR SERVICE

REPRESENTATIVE IMMEDIATELY WHEN THE CALL FOR

SERVICE SCREEN IS DISPLAYED. 5-3

Preventive Maintenance After a set number of copies have been made on your copier, Preventive Maintenance (PM) will be required for maintaining optimal performance. When preventive maintenance is due, a message and an icon ([ ? rm€aLL |) will prompt you to contact your service representative for maintenance. Ready to copy Please call service for PM To Check the PM Counter Follow the procedure below to check the PM counter to estimate the time when Preventive Maintenance is due. Î1. Press [P (COUNTER)] on the control panel. HEC HELP The Counter List Screen will be displayed.

Preventive Maintenance (continued) The PM counter will appear under the Printer counter on the screen. Counter list Serial Number _: 55AFO000 !

ITEM COUNTICTGLE START DATE

Total counter 12345678 12/12/03 Copier counter 12345676 Printer counter 12545678 Hcanner counter 12345070 FM counter. 12345678/a000000€ 12/12/07 HINT To print the Counter list including the PM counter, see p. 12-19.

. R shooting The Basic Screen will be restored. Preventive Maintenance

Clearing Mishandied Paper When a paper misfeed occurs, the copier stops making copies and mishandled paper codes display on the screen to indicate misfeed area(s). Copying operation cannot be continued until all the misfeed locations are cleared. Graphic Illustration key Touch to display the subsequent screens for the disposal action. Hishandled paper <\ Please renove a “Open RADF cover and feed unit, and remove paper Paper jam position display See the numbers flashing or lighting that indicate the jammed positions.

The above screen displays all the jam numbers for the sake of explanation. Actually a few numbers appear when a paper misfeed occurs. Message area An action will be displayed.

1. Touch Graphic Illustration on the screen.

The screenillustrating the method for the disposal action will be displayed. î Please Be Reminded! Before performing the clearing procedure, see p. 1-2 for the caution label locations inside the machine.

2. Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper.

Touch (æ) on the screen, if provided, to go to the next page of a series of illustrations. ( Please Be Reminded! When removing mishandied paper, be sure to leave no torn paper inside the machine.

Clearing Mishandied Paper (continued)

3. When completed, the Basic Screen will be restored.

If any misfeed location is left, the screen displays the next disposal procedure in the message area and the location number in the jam position display. Repeat steps 1 to 2 until all the locations are cleared. À WARNING The drum unit generates high voltage. To avoid bodily electrical shock, NEVER TOUCH the area. VAN CAUTION The internal fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH. VAN CAUTION Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as not to get injured. VAN CAUTION DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two RADF hinge portions, otherwise you may be injured. 5-7

When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) If a misfeed occurs with the print/scan job in progress while you are setting a reserve job, SCAN or PRINT JOB folder key on the Basic Screen will change to flashing JAM JOB. When more than four jobs have been specified and the folder key of the print/scan job in trouble is not currently displayed on the screen, the arrow key to scroll to that job will flash. Follow the procedure below to remove mishandled paper.

Hishandled paper <62-09> Please remove a paper folloying a quid LM sue 01 “Open RADF cover and feed unit, and renove paper 5-8

When “JAM” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) (continued) The screenillustrating the method for the disposal action will be displayed. HINT See p. 5-6 to p. 5-7 for details on clearing procedure. Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper. When all procedures are completed, the Basic Screen will be restored.

JAM JOB has changed to STOP, and the settings for the current pri ing job are displayed on the screen. Press [START]. The scan/print job will resume. Touch FREE JOB to continue the reserve job setting. nt- ÂÀ WARNING The drum unit generates high voltage. To avoid bodily electrical shock, NEVER TOUCH the area. AN CAUTION The internal fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH. AN CAUTION Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as not to get injured. AN CAUTION DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two RADF hinge portions, otherwise you may be injured. 5-9 Trouble: shooting JAM Key.

When “ADD PAPER” Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) If the paper supply for a print job in progress becomes depleted while you are setting a reserve job, PRINT JOB on the Basic Screen will change to flashing ADD PAPER. When more than four jobs have been specified and the folder key of the print job in trouble is not currently displayed on the screen, the arrow key to scroll to that job will flash. PP PAR 1 Follow the procedure below to continue the copying operation.

1. Display the Basic Screen for the print job in progress.

Touch ADD PAPER. The Basic Screen for the print job will be displayed. When the arrow key flashes, touch the key to scroll to the ADD PAPER folder key, then touch it to display the Basic Screen for the print job. Copying in progress

2. Checkthe flashing tray key, then supply that empty tray with copy

paper. When paper supply is completed, ADD PAPER changes to STOP. HINT See p. 2-24 to p. 2-33 for details on loading paper.

The print job will resume.

4. Touch FREE JOB to continue the reserve job setting.

When “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (Mem- ory Overflow) In certain modes, this printer/copier uses memory to make operations convenient and smooth flowing. Occasional memory overilow may occur if the installed memory is inadequate for the copy conditions selected. To handle the Memory overilow condition while in a job, take the appropriate action described below. These actions enable you to continue the job or suspend the job.

Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your service representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine. Memory Overflow in Current Job When memory overiflow occurs while scanning the first job, the machine stops immediately, and the screen provides JOB STOP and SCAN STOP as the only two available options. Copying in progress

If the job settings include Booklet mode, SCAN STOP will disappear. + To delete all the scanned data and discontinue the job, touch JOB STOP. + To give up further scanning but print out all the data already scanned into memory, touch SCAN STOP. 5-11 Trouble= shooting ADD PAPER Key Memory Overiow

When “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (Memory Overilow) (contin- Memory Overflow in Reserve Job When memory overflow occurs during the reserve operation, CONTINUE also appears on the active screen. In this case, the machine will not stop until all the jobs on standby for printing are completed. Copying in progress COURT. pying in progi ATE 1100 à 0 ME HUTEUT

If the job settings include Booklet mode, SCAN STOP will disappear. + To delete the scanned data and discontinue the last reserve job, touch JOB STOP. + To give up further scanning but print out the data already scanned for the last reserve job, touch SCAN STOP. + To continue scanning the last reserve job, touch CONTINUE as the current printing job gradually enables memory for new data. 5-12

When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed When any trouble affects the electric signal of the copier, the Power OFF/ ON Screen will be displayed. h OFF/ON Please turn the copier OFF, then after 10 seconds turn ON again. If S.Coce still occurs, call your Service Centre Follow the procedure below to turn the machine power off then on.

1. Turn OFF the sub power switch. Trouble

Memory The main power switch is not required to be turned off. Set Poe OFFION Screen

2. Wait about 10 seconds.

3. Turn ON the sub power switch.

Troubleshooting Tips COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER SWITCH IS ON Fully insert paper trays. Close RADF. Close Front doors of main body. Close Finisher door. Check to be sure main power switch is ON. Check to be sure power plug is firmly inserted in electrical socket.

COPY IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT

Manually adjust copy density to darker density. Check toner indicator and add toner, if required. Check paper for dampness. Do not leave paper in copier when humidity is high. Check to see if Photo, Text, or Increase Contrast mode is required. Check the Density shift.

COPY IMAGE IS TOO DARK

Manually adjust copy density to lighter density. Check to see if Photo, Text, or Increase Contrast mode is required. Check the Density shift. COPY IMAGE IS NOT CLEAN OR SHOWS SPOTS Use clean originals since dirt marks may be copied. Keep platen glass and inner surface of document cover clean. Call for service if “Call for service” is displayed in the message area. Check density indicator and lighten if required.

COPY PAPER MISHANDLES DURING COPYING

Fan copy paper and load it with curl side in proper location. Do not exceed the tray capacity.

COPY IMAGE CAN BE RUBBED OFF

Check copy paper thickness. Use Thick paper mode, if paper weight requires it.

MAGNIFICATION CANNOT BE CHANGED

Reduce & Shift is incompatible with magnification. Press [AUTO RESET] and set desired copying conditions without using Reduce & Shift.

DUPLEX MODES CANNOT BE SELECTED

Fully close RADF, then select Duplex mode again. COPYING DOES NOT BEGIN AFTER PRESSING [START] Insert or adjust the appropriate paper tray for paper size selected. Close document cover firmly. Close Front doors and Toner access door of main body completely. Close Finisher door completely. 5-14

Troubleshooting Tips (continued) COPYING DOES NOT RESUME AFTER MISHANDLED PAPER IS REMOVED Check copier diagram on touch screen for additional indications of mishandled paper.

COPY QUALITY IS POOR

Check paper for dampness, and replace it if necessary. THE ORIGINAL PAPER IS MISHANDLED OR SKEWED IN THE DOCUMENT FEEDER Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight. Be sure originals are not stapled. Align originals evenly in the RADF. Check to make sure paper guides meet the width of mixed size originals. COPY IMAGE IS SKEWED WHEN BYPASS IS USED Be sure copy paper is inserted straight. USING EKC, COPIES CANNOT BE MADE AFTER PASSWORD IS ENTERED Check to see if the message EXCEEDS LIMIT is displayed. Contact Key Operator to reset limit.

FINISHER DOES NOT OPERATE

Touch OUTPUT MENU. Check for a paper misfeed and remove it, as required. Properly close finisher door. RADF INDICATOR WILL NOT LIGHT AFTER [AUTO RESET] IS PRESSED Fully close RADF.

RADF LIGHT IS FLASHING

The document feeder is ready to accept originals. Insert originals on RADF tray, press [AUTO RESET], then [START].

ADD TONER MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED

New toner supply is needed. Follow instructions for adding toner. CALL FOR PM IS DISPLAYED IN MESSAGE AREA Contact your service representative for Preventive Maintenance.

APS SELECTS THE WRONG PAPER SIZE

Paper guides must be adjusted exactly to the size of originals. IN MIXED ORIGINAL MODE, A MESSAGE TO LOAD A REQUIRED PAPER SIZE DISPLAYS, EVEN THOUGH THAT SIZE IS LOADED IN ONE OF THE TRAYS Paper sizes loaded in the trays must be consistent with the tray position size; otherwise, the tray key on the Basic Screen will blink. 5-15 Trouble= shooting Copying. Hinis

Troubleshooting Tips (continued) THE BASIC SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY SETTINGS AS DESCRIBED

Check with the Key Operator, as Initial Settings may have been changed.

“PLEASE CHECK ORIGINAL”

This message displays when the copier detects a non-standard paper size on the platen glass. Select paper size and press [START]. 1.00 magnification will be selected automatically. If this message continues to display after selecting paper size, select 1.00 magnification, even if it is already indicated, then press [START]. If desired, ask your service representative to enable the machine to default to 1.00 magnification in this situation. SHEET INSERTION RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED Blank insertion: Be sure manuscript originals do not already include blank sheets in the locations designated for sheet insertion. Copy insertion: To ensure that chapter sheets in 1-2 mode always appear on the right hand side in the finished set, insertion sheets must be designated on the page setting screen with odd numbers, not even. If required, make an even numbered original page odd by inserting a blank sheet in front of that page, so that the blank sheet is even and the insertion sheet is odd. FINISHER STAPLE RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED The 2 staple position functions only on copy paper that is loaded vertically (portrait style).

COPIES SKEW IN THE STAPLED SETS

Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray. Reload the copy paper upside down.

USING PUNCH, COPIES CANNOT BE PUNCHED

Check to see if the message “Waste basket of Punching kit (unit) is full” is displayed. Empty the waste basket. COPIES CANNOT BE STAPLED OR PUNCHED IN POSITION Check to make sure the side guide plates are securely aligned to the copy paper in the paper tray to be used. Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray. Reload the copy paper upside down. 5-16

SECTION Machine Specifications Main Body & Option Specifications Main Body Specifications... 6-2 Option Specifications 6-4

Main Body Specifications Main Body Name: Type: Transfer method: Platen glass: Light-sensitive unit: Light source: Developing method: Fixing method: Density adjustment: Magnification ratio: Copy paper: Copying speed: Continuous copying: Types of original: Original size: Copy size: Paper supply method: Warm-up time: First copy time: Power: Power consumption: Sound power level: Weight: Konica 7255/7272 Console type indirect electrostatic method Fixed OPC Xenon lamp Dry, 2-component magnetic brush developing Heat roller Automatic and manual (9 steps) 1:141.0% Enlargement: 1:1.150 (115%), 1:1.220 (122%), 1:1.410 (141%), 1:2.000 (200%) Reduction: 1:0.860 (86%), 1:0.820 (82%), 1:0.710 (71%), 1:0.500 (50%) Zoom/Special magnification ratio: 25% to 400% in 1% increments Userset: 3 Plain paper: 50 to 200g/m? Special paper: Transparent film, Labels, Tab, 3-hole 7255; 55 copies/min. (A4), 43 copies/min. (A4R), 32 copies/min. (43), 55 copies/min. (B5), 48 copies/min. (B5R), 37 copies/min. (B4) 7272; 72 copies/min. (A4), 54 copies/min. (A4R), 41 copies/min. (43), 72 copies/min. (B5), 60 copies/min. (B5R), 46 copies/min. (B4) 1 to 9,999 copies Sheet, book originals A3 or 11”x17” maximum A3 to A6R (image cutoff width: leading and trailing ends 3.0mm + 4.0mm, top and bottom 2.0mm + 2.0mm) Tray 1 (fixed); 1,500 sheets (80 g/m?) (main body tray) Tray 2 (fixed); 1,000 sheets (80 g/m?) (main body tray) Tray 3 (universal); 500 sheets (80 g/m?) (main body tray) Tray 4 (universal); 500 sheets (80 g/m?) (main body) LCT (fixed); 4,000 sheets (80 g/m?) (LT-402 option) LCT (fixed); 4,000 sheets (80 g/m?) (LT-412 option) Multi-sheet bypass tray; 100 sheets (80 g/m?) Approximately 5 minutes (7255) / 6 minutes (7272) Approx. 3.4 seconds (A4) (7255) / 3.0 seconds (A4) (7272) AC 230V/50Hz (This equipment selects the correct voltage automatically.)

2.0 KW max. (with option)

75 dB max. (main body) Approx. 216kg (main body 204.5kg + RADF 11.5kg) These specifications are subject to change without notice. 6-2

Main Body Specifications (continued) Size: 650(W) x 766(D) x 1140(H)mm (main body + RADF ) 1742(W) x 766(D) x 1140(H)mm (main body + RADF + FS- 110/210 + LT-402) Effective size*: 1276(W) x 766(D) mm (main body + RADF) 1821(W) x 766(D) mm (main body + RADF + FS-110/210 + LT-402) *: Effective size is the dimensions required when the Multi-sheet bypass tray is opened. RADF (DF-322) Function: Feeds 1- and 2-sided originals automatically Type of original: Plain paper (50 to 130g/m?) Original size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5SR, A5, A5R, 11"x17", 8.5"x11" Original capacity: 100 sheets max. (80g/m°) Original insertion: Automatic feed at a time Dimensions: 600(W) x 570(D) x 150(H)mm Weight: Approx. 11.5kg Power source: Supply from main body These specifications are subject to change without notice. 6-3

Option Specifications FS-110/210 In-Bin Stapler Finisher Type: Sorting system: Paper size: Paper type: Number of stapled sheet: Staple cartridge: Dimensions: Weight: Power source: Offset catch tray Sorting by shifting (approx. 30mm) A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5, A5R, B6, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"

• A4R/8.5"x11"R only in Three-Fold mode Secondary (sub) tray is also available for exiting Non STD size paper. Normal (60 to 90g/m?) Thick (91 to 200g/m?), Thin (50 to 59g/m}?)

• 60 to 80g/m? in Three-Fold mode Special (Transparent film, Labels, Tab, 4-hole) 50 sheets max. or 5 mm or less (80g/m? paper) 5,000 staples 656(W) x 656(D) x 990(H) mm Approx. 55kg (FS-110) / 65kg (FS-210) Supply from main body FS-111 In-Bin Stapler Finisher Type: Sorting system: Paper size: Paper type: Number of stapled sheet: Staple cartridge: Dimensions: Weight: Power sourse: Offset catch tray Sorting by shifting (approx. 30mm) A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, B6, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" Secondary (sub) tray is also abailable for exiting Non STD size paper. Normal (60 to 90g/m?) Thick (91 to 200g/m?), Thin (50 to 59g/m}?) Special (Transparent fim, Labels, Tab, 4-hole) 100 sheets max. or 10 mm or less (80g/m? paper) 5,000 staples 544(W) x 656(D) x 1095(H) mm Approx. 65kg Supply from main body SF-101 Shift Tray Type: Sorting system: Paper sizes: Dimensions: Weight: Power source: Offset catch tray Sorting by shifting (30 + 2 mm) (copies are delivered face down) A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, A6R, 11”x17”, 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11”, 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" (50 to 200 g/m? paper) 400/490*(W) x 480(D) x 600(H) mm

• When the tray is extended. Approx. 15 kg Supply from main body These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Option Specifications (continued) PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder Function: Paper feed into Finisher FS-110/210 Configuration: 2 trays (upper/lower) Capacity: 200 sheets max. or 30mm or less (200g/m? paper) each Paper type: Plain/Recycled (60 to 90g/m°), Thick (91 to 200g/m?), Thin (50 to 59g/m?), Special (Transparent film, Labels, Tab, 4- hole) Paper size: Upper tray: A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" Lower tray: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", Wide size (max. 314mm x 445mm) Dimensions: 511(W) x 620(D) x 220(H) mm Weight: Approx. 10.5kg Power source: Supply from finisher PK-110/120 Punching Kit Function: Punching file holes in copies Number of punch holes: 4 Hole diameter: 6.5mm + 0.5mm Hole pitch: 80mm + 0.5mm Paper type: Plain/Recycled (60 to 90g/m?) Thick (91 to 170g/m?), Thin (50 to 59g/m°?) *Some 170g/m? paper types may not be punched easily. Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, B5, 11x17", 8.5"x11" Dimensions: PK-110: 68(W) x 442(D) x 120(H) mm PK-120: 130(W) x 470(D) x 115(H) mm Weight: PK-110: Approx. 2kg PK-120: Approx. 3kg Power source: Supply from finisher PK-120 Type-A Punching Kit Function: Punching file holes in copies Number of punch holes: 4 Hole diameter: 6.5mm + 0.5mm Hole pitch: 21mm + 0.5mm/70mm + 0.5mm/21mm + 0.5mm Paper type: Plain/Recycled (60 to 90g/m?) Thick (91 to 170g/m?), Thin (50 to 59g/m°?) *Some 170g/m? paper types may not be punched easily. Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, B5, 11x17", 8.5"x11" Dimensions: 130(W) x 470(D) x 115(H) mm Weight: Approx. 3kg Power source: Supply from finisher These specifications are subject to change without notice. 6-5

Option Specifications (continued) P2Z-108 Punching / Z-Folding Unit Function: Punching file holes in copies and Z-folding the copies Number of punch holes: 4 Hole diameter: 6.5mm + 0.5mm Hole pitch: 80mm + 0.5mm Paper in Punch mode: A3, B4, A4, B5 (50 to 170g/m?) *Some 170g/m? paper types may not be punched easily. Paper in Z-Fold mode: A3, B4 (60 to 90g/m?) Folded width: 209mm or less for A3 181mm or less for B4 Dimensions: 169(W) x 660(D) x 930(H) mm Weight: Approx. 38kg Power source: Supply from outlet P2Z-109 Punching / Z-Folding Unit Function: Punching file holes in copies and Z-folding the copies Number of holes: 2 holes or 4 holes Hole diameter: 6.5mm + 0.5mm Hole pitch: 80mm + 0.5mm Folding type: Z-fold for A3, B4, 11”x17”, double-fold for 8.5”x14” Folded width: 209mm or less for A3 181mm or less for B4 215mm or less for 11”x17” 261.6mm or less for 8.5”x14” Dimensions: 169(W) x 660(D) x 930(H) mm Weight: Approx. 38kg Power source: Supply from outlet Paper weight: 50 -170* g/m?

60 - 90* g/m? for Z-Fold mode

*Some 170g/m? paper types may not be punched easily. Paper in Punch mode: 2 holes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 8.5’x11”, 8.5”x11"R, 5.5”x8.5”, 5.5”x8.5"R 4holes: A3, B4, A4, B5, 8.5”x11” Paper in Z-Fold mode: A3, B4, 11”x17"(Z-fold), 8.5”x14”(double-fold) All other paper sizes will be output without Z-fold/double-fold. These specifications are subject to change without notice. 6-6

Option Specifications (continued) LT-402 Large Capacity Tray Function: Paper feed into main body Capacity: 4,000 sheets (80g/m? paper) Paper type: Plain/Recycled (60 to 90g/m?) Thick (91 to 200g/m?) Paper size: A4, B5, 8.5"x1 1", Wide size (314mm x 223mm) Dimensions: 430(W) x 639(D) x 690(H) mm Weight: Approx. 30kg Power source: Supply from main body LT-412 Large Capacity Tray Function: Paper feed into main body Capacity: 4,000 sheets (80g/m? paper) Paper type: Plain/Recycled (60 to 90g/m?) Thick (91 to 200g/m?) Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, Wide size (max. 314mm x 459mm) Dimensions: 670(W) x 639(D) x 695(H) mm Weight: Approx. 42kg Power source: Supply from main body Expanded Memory Unit MU-401: 64MB MU-402: 128MB Others IP-511 Image Processor HD-105 Type-A Hard Disk Drive PS-351 Type-A Post Script Level 3 Key Counter These specifications are subject to change without notice. 6-7

Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) The Weekly Timer function manages a copier to be turned on and off at the time specified by the Key Operator to disable copying during off time. This function is not factory-set. When a copier is under control of the Weekly Timer function, the TIMER indicator on the right side of the control panel is lit. Û = INTERAUET ) Please Be Reminded! IMPORTANT: WHEN THE TIMER INDICATOR IS LIT, THE COPIER WILL TURN OFF AUTOMATICALLY. DO NOT TURN IT OFF BY PRESSING POWER SWITCH. When the TIMER indicator light is on and other indicators are off, copying is unavailable due to the Weekly Timer function. However, copying will be available by using the following procedure. Î1. Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] on the control panel. Û = INTERAUET HINT For details of the Weekly Timer function, see p. 18-27 to p. 13-35. The Basic screen will be displayed along with the message shown below. Timer interrupt mode Enter password

The machine power will be turned off automatically after 5 minutes from this state. 7-2

Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) (continued) The Timer Interrupt password is not factory set and must be entered by the Key Operator. In the event the Timer Interrupt password has not been entered by the Key Operator, the following message will display instead. Input copy time O hour(s) 05 minute(s) When the above message displays, proceed to step 4. Enter the password. Enter a 4-digit number Timer Interrupt password using the keypad on the control panel. CZ nr For setting the Timer Interrupt password, see p. 13-35.

Entering a number smaller than 5 will set the minute at 5. Press [START]. Copying is available until the set time is up. 7-3 Weekiy. Timer Advanced Information

Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) (continued)

8. When Timer Interrupt of the copier is finished, press [POWER

SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer, then release it. The copier returns to the OFF condition and copying is again disabled.

Rotation This function allows you to utilize APS or AMS and copy the original documents onto size A4 or B5, irrespective of the copy paper feeding direction. Meeky

By default, Rotation requires APS or AMS to function. The Key Operator Roraton can set this function ON, or to operate when APS, AMS or reduce functions. See p. 13-39 to p. 13-45. [Original | [Copy] [Original | [copy] Rotation copying Rotation copying ABCD|, a Q A4R à A3 à ee] < < [a] <]}|}ascn) gr | 8 ABCD A4 B5 à

B4 Normal copying Normal copying ABCD ABC ua | ABCD A4R ABCD| |aBco B5 Advanced B5R |A porn Ni B5 BCD Information The copier is initially set to activate the Rotation function automatically. Follow the procedure below to release/resume this function.

1. Touch ROTATION OFF on the Basic Screen to highlight it.

Position original in the RADF When Rotation is released, the Rotation icon on the Basic Screen will disappear to indicate that this function is cancelled.

2. Touch to deselect ROTATION OFF to resume this function.

When Rotation is resumed, the Rotation icon will be displayed on the screen. 7-5

Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode Use the Vertical/Horizontal zoom mode to reduce or enlarge vertical and horizontal dimensions, independentily. >>>Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode Specifications<<< 9 Vertical/Horizontal zoom range: 0.25 - 4.00 9 Incompatible Conditions: APS, AMS, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Overlay with Repeat The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal zoom. Length: 0.50, Width: 0.50 Length: 0.50, Width: 1.00 Length: 0.50, Width: 2.00 Length: 0.50, Width: 4.00 HOE Width à aBcDE à

ABCDE ABCDE Length: 4.00, Width: 0.50 Length: 4.00, Width: 1.00 Length: 4.00, Width: 2.00 Length: 4.00, Width: 4.00

1. Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen.

The popup menu for setting a zoom ratio will be displayed. ÿ Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 7-6

Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode (continued)

2. Touch Vert. on the popup menu to highlight it, then set the vertical

4. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 avr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

6. Position original(s).

HINT See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode (continued)

The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/ Horizontal zoom with an original placed slantwise on the platen glass.

AN LT \ Length: 0.50, Width: 2.00 Length: 2.00, Width: 0.50 _ I] a j 2 / 7 Length: 0.50, Width: 2.00 Length: 2.00, Width: 0.50 7-8

Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch&Fold) The Fold and Stitch & Fold modes are available only when the FS-210 Finisher option is installed. When either mode is selected, the Booklet feature is automatically selected and indicated on the Application Selection Screen.

+ _ When copying two-sided signature originals using the Fold or Stitch & Fold mode, release the automatically selected Booklet mode on the Application Selection Screen. + When copying dark originals or using Reverse Image mode together with Fold or Stitch & Fold mode, the folded line of the output copies may be slightly shifted. The following copy results may be expected when using Fold or Stitch & Fold mode: In the Fold mode, each copied set is folded and output to the Booklet tray of the Finisher. In the Stitch & Fold mode, each copied set is stapled at two positions (saddle stitched), then folded and output to the Booklet tray of the Fin- isher. >>>Specifications for Fold / Stitch & Fold Mode<<< O Max. number of folded sheets (80 g/m? paper) in both modes: Fold: 8 sheets (less than in Stitch & Fold mode because they are not clinched first) Stitch & Fold: 20 sheets 19 sheets when using thick cover paper 9 Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R (60 - 90 gm?) 9 Booklet tray capacity: When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the Finisher will stop operating. Select the appropriate print quantity by referring to the following capacities. Approx. 100 sheets max. (A3, B4, 11"x17", 8.5"x14") Fold: 33 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet (33 x 3 = 99 sheets) Stitch & Fold: 20 sets max. of 5-sheet-folded booklet (20 x 5 = 100 sheets) 5 sets max. of 20-sheet-folded booklet (5 x 20 = 100 sheets) Approx. 75 sheets max. (A4R, 8.5"x11"R) Fold: 25 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet (25 x 3 = 75 sheets) Stitch & Fold: 15 sets max. of 5-sheet-folded booklet (15 x 5 = 75 sheets) OIncompatible Conditions with Booklet selected: APS, 1-1, 2-1, Sort, Staple- sort, Group, Rotation sort, Rotation group, Output to Secondary (sub) tray, Three-Fold, Punch, Mixed Original, Full Area in Non STD size, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, OHP Interleave, Program Job, Non- Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat OIncompatible conditions without Booklet: Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Output to Secondary (sub) tray, Three-Fold, Punch, OHP Interleave, Reverse Image 7-9 VericalHor- zontal Zoom Fold / Stitch&Fold Advanced Information

Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch&Fold) (continued [ Stich& Fois | & Fold

The Output Mode popup menu will be displayed.

Selecting FOLD or STITCH & FOLD will automatically switch the output tray to Booklet tray. Notice that the arrow pointing from the MAIN TRAY shifts to the Booklet tray. 7-10

Making Folded Booklet (Fold | Stitch&Fold) (continued)

Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu. The Basic Screen will be restored and the selection made in the output mode will be reflected in the OUTPUT icon area. Select additional copying features, as required.

NO COVER SHEET of Booklet is initially selected. To change this selection, touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen, then touch Booklet twice to display the Booklet Mode Selection Screen to make another selection or to release the setting. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. C2 avr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s). HINT See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity: Fold mode: 12 pages or less for simplex copying 6 pages or less for duplex copying Stitch & Fold mode: 80 pages or less for simplex copying 40 pages or less for duplex copying Exceeding the above capacity limits may cause trouble in the Finisher. Press [START]. VAN CAUTION When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the Finisher will cease operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from the specifications shown on p. 11-3. 7-11 Fold / Stitch&Fold Advanced Information

Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch) The Punch mode is available only when the PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punch- ing kit or PZ-108/109 Punching / Z-Folding unit option is installed in the FS- 110/FS-210 Finisher, or PZ-108/109 Punching / Z-Folding unit option is installed in the FS-111 Finisher. If both PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching kit and PZ-108/109 Punching / Z- Folding unit are installed in the FS-110/FS-210 Finisher, the PZ-108/109 Punching / Z-Folding unit is used. When the Punch mode is selected in combination with any of the Primary (Main) tray output modes, each copied sheet is punched and output to the Primary tray according to the selected output mode.

+ Some staple positions previously selected may conflict with this function. + Special size paper (STD size (special), Non STD size, Wide size) cannot be punched. + Ifthe ATS (Automatic Tray Switching) functions while the machine uses the PK-110 Punching kit in Punch mode, the punch holes may be slighily off the appropriate positions. () Please Be Reminded! + Do not punch special paper type such as transparent films, labels, tabbed sheets, etc. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur in Punch- ing kit. + Be sure that the side guide plates of the paper tray are securely aligned to the paper; otherwise the copies may not be punched in position. >>>Specifications for Punch Mode<<< 9 Number of holes: PK-110/120 Punching kit; 4 holes PK-120 Type-A Punching kit; 4 holes (Swedish type) PZ-108 Punching / Z-Folding unit; 4 holes PZ-109 Punching / Z-Folding unit; 2 or 4 holes (user-selective) O'Hole diameter: 6.5 mm + 0.5 mm DHole pitch: 80 mm + 0.5 mm 21mm+0.5 mm/70mm+0.5 mm/21 mm + 0.5 mm (PK-120 Type-A) O Copy paper size: 4holes; A3, B4, F4, A4, B5, 8.5"x11” 2 holes; A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 8.5”x11”, 8.5’x11’R, 5.5"x8.5”, 5.5"x8.5"R 0 Paper weight: 60 - 90 g/m? (80 g/m? paper recommended) Thin paper: 50 - 59 g/m? Thick paper: 91 - 170* g/m? *Some 170 g/m? paper types may not be punched easily. 9 incompatible Conditions: Using platen glass (available when using Platen store mode), Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Output to Secondary (sub) tray, Non STD Size, OHP Interleave 7-12

Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch) (continued) [incompatible Conditions with Punch mode using PK-110 Punching kit: Cover sheet feeding, Mixed Original (A4R, B5R, A5, A5R mixed and/or selecting APS mode), Sheet/Cover Insertion, Copy Insertion mode in Chap- ter, Cover Sheet mode in Booklet, Program Job 80mm{"] | sn: 21 mm] 70 mm || ° nr m2 TT] Punch 2 holes 4 holes 4 holes (PK-120 Type-A only)

1. Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen

The Output Mode popup menu will be displayed.

The Punch Position popup menu will be displayed. 7-13

Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch) (continued)

4. Touch the desired punch position key on the screen to highlight

it. finisher mode PUNCH.

5. Touch OK on the Punch Position popup menu to restore the Out-

put Mode popup menu.

6. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu to complete the

setting and return to the Basic Screen. The selection made in punch position will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area. Z. Specify the original set direction. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Orig- inal popup menu. Touch to select the desired original set direction, then touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. 7-14

Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch) (continued)

8. Select additional copying features, as required.

9. Enterthe desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

10. Position originals in the document feeder.

HINT See p. 3-2 to p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals.

À CAUTION ‘ ‘ When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Advanced Information 7-15

Output Z-Folded Copies (Z-Fold) The Z-Fold mode is available only when the PZ-108/109 Punching / Z-Fold- ing unit option is installed in the FS-110/111/210 Finisher. When the Z-Fold mode is selected in combination with any of the Primary (main) tray output modes, the original image is copied on copy paper and output to the Primary (main) tray of the Finisher according to the selected output mode.

7-16 >>>Specifications for Z-Fold Mode<<< OFold type: Z-fold (A3, B4, 11”x17”), double-fold (8.5”x14”) D Paper size: A3, B4, 11”x17”, 8.5’x14” (60 - 90 g/m? paper) All other paper sizes will be output without Z-fold or double-fold. 9 Folded width*: 209 mm or less for A3 181 mm or less for B4 215 mm or less for 11”x17”

261.6 mm or less for 8.5”x14”

• The width from the paper edge to the first folded line O When using Mixed Original mode with Z-Fold mode, A3 and B4 originals should not be mixed, otherwise the Z-Fold mode may not function properly. 9 Special paper type (Thick 2, transparent films, labels, tabbed sheets) and non-standard size (STD size (special), Non STD size, Wide paper) cannot be Z-folded. Using special paper will cause the machine trouble. Some plain paper types may cause folded line to shift in Z-Fold mode. 9 When using Z-fold, Staple-sort and APS for mixed size originals, heed the limits on capacity described on p. 11-4. [incompatible Conditions: Using platen glass (available when Platen store mode is selected), Staple-sort using B4 or 8.5’x14”, Output to Secondary (sub) tray, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Tandem mode, OHP Interleave

Z-Fold Z-Fold + Staple-sort + APS with Mixed Original Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen The Output Mode popup menu will be displayed.

Output Z-Folded Copies (Z:Fold) (continued)

4. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu to complete the "Prin

setting and return to the Basic Screen. The Z-FOLD icon will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area.

5. Select additional copying features, as required.

6. Enterthe desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

7. Position originals.

HINT See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

À CAUTION When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; other- wise, mishandied paper will occur. 7-17

Output Three-Folded Copies (Three-Fold) The Three-Fold mode is available only when the FS-210 Finisher option is installed. In this mode, the original image is copied on A4R/8.5"x11"R copy paper and output to the Booklet tray of the Finisher. >>>Specifications for Three-Fold Mode<<< 0 Copy paper size: A4R, 8.5"x11"R (60 - 80 g/m? paper) 0 Number of folded sheets: 3 sheets max. (80 g/m? only) 9 Booklet tray capacity: 50 sets max. of 1-sheet-folded set (50 sheets) Oincompatible Conditions: Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Output to Secondary (sub) tray, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Punch, OHP Interleave, Dual Page, Program Job, Reverse Image IIS

1. Load A4R or 8.5"x11"R copy paper in a tray.

2. Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen

The Output Mode popup menu will be displayed.

Output Three-Folded Copies (Thre Fold) (continued)

4. Touch THREE-FOLDto highlight it.

5. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu to complete the

setting and return to the Basic Screen. The THREE-FOLD icon will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area. Three-Fold Cover Sheet Feccing

6. Select additional copying features, as required.

Touch to highlight the A4R or 8.5"x11"R tray key, if not already highlighted.

7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HT LA See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. Information

8. Position originals.

C2 avr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

À CAUTION When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the Finisher will cease operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from the specifications shown on p. 11-3. 7-19

Cover Sheet Feeding The Cover Sheet Feeder (PI-110) is available as an option on the FS-110/ 210 Finisher. Load cover sheet paper into this device and use the sheets as front covers for copied sets output to the Main tray or use the sheets as booklet-type covers for copied sets output to the Booklet tray in the Fold, Stitch & Fold, or Three-Fold mode.

+ _ Paper loaded into the cover sheet feeder cannot be copied. + This function is incompatible with cover sheet mode (COVER WITH COPY SHEET and COVER WITH BLANK SHEET) in Booklet and cover mode in Sheet/Cover Insertion. >>>Specifications for Cover Sheet Feeding<<< © Cover paper size: Upper tray: A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"* Lower tray: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5*, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"* *A5 and 5.5"x8.5" paper sizes are available in portrait type feeding only. 0 Tray capacity: 200 sheets (200 g/m? paper) or 30 mm thick for both trays 9 incompatible Conditions: Output to Secondary (sub) tray, Punch using PK- 110 Punching kit, Z-Fold, OHP Interleave Copied set with covers and insertions Î Cover sheet Copied set with RL il covers attached in >, Staple-sort mode Copied sets with cover - attached in Fold or _ Stitch & Fold mode =

1. Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen

The Output Mode popup menu will be displayed. 7-20

Cover Sheet Feeding (continued)

Touch and highlight FRONT COVER only, if using Fold or Stitch & Fold mode. HINT Copy paper sizes available to be loaded are different in each tray. See the specification on the previous page to select the appropriate tray. If no insertions are needed, proceed to step 6. 7-21

Cover Sheet Feeding (continued)

5. Specify the insertion location.

To use cover paper for insertions, touch INSERT to highlight it. Use the con- trol panel keypad to enter the page number of the insertion location, then touch SET to complete the entry and move to the next key. To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. If p. 4 is entered, a cover sheet will be inserted between p. 4 and p. 5. If setting more than 15 locations including covers, touch the arrow key to move to the next page.

+ Page numbers entered out of order will be sorted automatically. + Entering “0” or the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen. + When a page number entered is larger than the total original page count, it will be ignored.

7. Touch OKonthe Output Mode popup menu.

The Basic Screen will be restored.

8. Select additional copying features, as required.

9. Loadthe cover sheet paper into the optional cover sheet feeder of

the FS-110/210 Finisher. If the paper size loaded in the cover sheet feeder is not suitable for the selected copy User conditions, the following messages will be |L°wer \X displayed and copying will be unavailable till the correct size is loaded. Please load cover sheet in cover sheet feeder Adapt paper size between cover sheet and selected paper

10. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. 7-22

Cover Sheet Feeding (continued)

11. Position originals.

See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

VAN CAUTION When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; Puncl otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Using Finisher Manualy pre 7-23

Using Finisher Manually This function is available only with the Cover Sheet Feeder option (PI-110) installed on the FS-110/210 Finisher. To use this convenient function, simply place a set of paper into the lower tray of the cover sheet feeder, select the desired mode from the Manual Finishing operation panel located on the top of the Finisher, then press the Start/Stop button. Available finishing modes according to the optional configuration are described below. FS-110 Finisher + PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder + 1 oblique staple + 2 parallel staples FS-110 Finisher + PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder + PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching Kit + 1 oblique staple + 2 parallel staples + Punch FS-210 Finisher + PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder + 1 oblique staple + 2 parallel staples + Stitch & Fold (2 staples in the centre + Fold) + Three-Fold FS-210 Finisher + PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder + PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching Kit + 1 oblique staple + 2 parallel staples + Stitch & Fold (2 staples in the centre + Fold) + Three-Fold + Punch >>>Specifications for Manual Staple 1 oblique staple and 2 parallel staples<<< 0 Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5*, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R “A5 paper is available in portrait type feeding only. 0 Paper weight: 50 - 200 g/m? 9 Staple capacity: 50 sheets max. 9 Output tray: Primary (main) tray >>>Specifications for Manual Punch<<< 0 Paper size: A3 to B5 9 Paper weight: 50 - 170* g/m? *: Some 170 g/m? paper types may not be punched easily. 9 Punch capacity: 200 sheets max. (200 g/m? paper) or within 30 mm thick 9 Output tray: Primary (main) tray OThe machine with PZ-108/109 Punching / Z-Folding unit requires PK-110/ 120/120 Type-A Punching kit to use this function. 7-24

Using Finisher Manually (continued >>>Specifications for Manual Stitch & Fold mode<<< 9 Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R 9 Paper weight: 60-200g/m? 9 Staple capacity: 20 sheets max. (80g/m? paper) 19 sheets max. (80g/m? paper with a thick paper cover) 9 Output tray: Booklet tray >>>Specifications for Three-Fold mode<<< 9 Paper size: A4R, 8.5"x11"R 9 Paper weight: 60-80g/m°? 9 Folding capacity: 3 sheets max. (80g/m? only) 9 Output tray: Booklet tray Start/Stop button

Information Advanced 2 parallel staples Three-Fold Place a set of paper to be finished into the lower tray of the cover sheet feeder, as described below for each mode. + 1 oblique staple / 2 parallel staples: FACE UP + Punch: FACE UP + Stitch & Fold: FACE UP for the outside of the finished set + Three-Fold: FACE UP for the outside of the folded set Align the guide plate. The indicator light of Start/Stop button will turn green. C2 avr Refer to the specifications for available paper size and capacity in each mode. Guide plate (Q Please Be Reminded! Do not punch special paper type such as transparent films, labels, tabbed sheets, etc. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur in Punching kit. 7-25

Using Finisher Manually (continued)

Punch mode is compatible with 1 oblique staple, 2 parallel staples, or Stitch & Fold mode.

3. Press Start/Stop button.

Finished sheets will be delivered to the appropriate tray according to the selected mode.

1f you want to stop the Manual Finishing operation, press the Start/Stop button again. The Finisher will cease operating. When using Stitch & Fold mode, the unfinished set will be left in the stacker unit inside the Finisher. À caution When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 7-26

Using Two Copiers in Tandem Tandem mode enables your 7255/7272 primary (master) copier to work in tandem with the 7255/7272 secondary (sub) copier for the purpose of providing faster completion of large copying jobs. Two units working in tandem distribute a job in half the time of non-tandem mode. Service setting is required to use the tandem mode. Contact your service representative, if desired. >>>Specifications for Tandem Mode<<< 9 The two copiers should be connected in either way described below. (1)Connect the two copiers directly using a crossover cable. In this case, other network functions provided to the copier will be unavailable. (2)Connect each of the two copiers to the hub in a network using straight- through cables. Use the straight-through or crossover cables of Category 5 or of the later standard to connect the machines. OThe combination of the two copiers can be either the same models (two 7255 copiers or two 7272 copiers) or different models (7255 and 7272). OTwo copiers should have the same optional configuration except for the option tray (LT-402/LT-412). Two copiers should be turned on and ready for copying. The copier with the TANDEM key highlighted on the Output Mode popup menu will be the primary (master) copier, turning both copiers into the tandem mode. Select the copying conditions, scan originals, and press [START] on the primary copier to operate both copiers in tandem to complete a job. O Print quantity must be set for [2] or more copies to activate the tandem mode. When the print quantity entered is an odd number, the primary copier will copy and output one sheet/set more than the secondary copier to accommodate the job. 9 Auto low power/Auto shut-off may function while tandem mode is selected. + Ifthe tandem mode is selected while the secondary copier is in Auto low power mode, the power saving mode will be released automatically. - The tandem mode will not be selected when the secondary copier is turned off by Auto shut-off. Release the Auto shut-off mode by pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. - If Auto low power is activated on the secondary copier during the tandem job setting, the power saving mode will be released automatically when printing job starts. - If Auto shut-off is activated on the secondary copier during the tandem job setting, the tandem mode will be released automatically. - If Auto low power/Auto shut-off is activated on the primary copier, the tandem mode will be released automatically. 9 Auto reset may function while tandem mode is selected. Initially, the tandem mode will be released automatically if Auto reset is activated on the primary copier. Key operator can set the primary copier to select the tandem mode as initial setting. Apply this setting to the primary copier only, if desired. Setting on both copiers will deactivate the tandem mode. 7-27 Tandem Mode Advanced Information

Using Two Copiers in Tandem (continued) O The 7255/7272 is provided with an Allocation recovery mode, which functions when trouble occurs in either the primary or secondary copier to allow the trouble-free copier to complete the job. OWhen the two copiers in tandem mode have the same EKC password registered, copying will be available by entering the EKC password in the primary copier only. The password will be transmitted to the secondary copier. OInterrupt copying is available only on the copier with [INTERRUPT] pressed. Of the primary copier is installed with HDD, the image data stored in HDD can be output in tandem mode copying. 9 Corresponding tray sizes on the primary and secondary copiers should be the same when using multiple trays for a single job. Oincompatible Conditions: Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Group, Rotation, OHP Interleave, SET NUMBERING and WATERMARK NUMBERING in Stamp

1. Tum power on by pressing the Power switches of the two copiers.

Confirm that both copiers are ready to copy with the Basic Screen displayed.

2. Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen of either copier.

The Output Mode popup menu will be displayed.

The copier with TANDEM highlighted will become the primary copier; the other copier will function as the secondary copier. The Master icon displays on the Basic Screen of the primary copier to indicate that the two units are ready to work in tandem mode. Position original in the RADF FONCTION SPECIAL CAR 7-28

Using Two Copiers in Tandem (continued)

The Sub icon will display on the Basic Screen of the secondary copier when [START] is pressed on the primary copier to start the tandem printing operation.

The tandem mode cannot be selected/continued in the cases shown below. The message “Please wait/ Reserve is not available in Sub machine,” “Sub machine error/ Please check sub machine,” or “Please check sub machine” will be displayed, as required. + The tandem mode cannot be selected while the secondary copier is in the off state, due to Auto shut-off. Press [POWER SAVER ON/ OFF] to release it. + Selected tandem mode will be released automatically when the secondary copier activates Auto shut-off. Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] to release it, then select the tandem mode again to restart the procedure. + When any problem occurs in the secondary copier, such as a paper misfeed or lack of paper, the secondary copier will be unavailable for printing; however, the problem will not cause tandem mode to be released. Take the appropriate troubleshooting measures to be ready for copying. + Tandem printing job cannot be started if 10 reserve jobs (not in tandem mode) are entered on the secondary copier. Wait until the reserve jobs are completed on the secondary copier. + Selected tandem mode will be released automatically when the primary copier activates Auto low power/Auto shut-off. Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] to release Auto shut-off if required, then select the tandem mode again to restart the procedure. Select the desired copying conditions on the primary copier.

Ordinary copying operation is still available on the secondary copier during the tandem mode setting. Enter print quantity on the primary copier, using the keypad. When a print quantity amount of 100 is entered, the primary and secondary copiers will each copy and output 50 sheets.

+ Print quantity must be set for [2] or more copies to activate the tandem mode. + When the print quantity entered is an odd number, the primary copier will copy and output one sheet/set more than the secondary copier to accommodate the job. 7-29 Tandem Mode Advanced Information

Using Two Copiers in Tandem (continued)

6. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass of the primary copier. CZ nr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

7. Press [START] on the control panel of the primary copier.

The Sub icon ( ) will display on the Basic Screen of the secondary copier to indicate that the two copiers will start working in tandem. The tandem mode will be released automatically when the tandem mode copying is completed, and the Master and Sub icons on each Basic Screen will disappear. Q FOR DETAILS: Entering reserve job during Tandem mode copying If scanning of the next reserved job is performed during the tandem mode copying, that job will also be performed in the tandem mode. Up to 10 jobs including the present job can be reserved. Interrupt mode during Tandem mode copying Interrupt copying is available only on the copier with [INTERRUPT] pressed. The tandem mode copying on the copier in interrupt mode will be suspended until the interrupt copying is completed. If the interrupt mode period is of long standing, the Allocation recovery mode will activate to enable the other copier to handle the remaining print quantity. 7-30

Using Two Copiers in Tandem (continued) To Stop Scanning/Printing To cancel the tandem copying job: Î1. Press [STOP] on the control panel of the primary copier. The scanning/printing job stops immediately, and the popup menu appears on the Basic Screen of the primary copier to ask you whether to continue or terminate the job. At this time, the tandem mode is not released. Press START to restart

2. Touch CONTINUE to go on, or EXIT to delete all the scanned data

and to release the tandem mode. To cancel the job in the secondary copier only: Î1. Press [STOP] on the control panel of the secondary copier. The secondary copier stops the current operation immediately, and the popup menu appears on the Basic Screen of the secondary copier to ask you whether to continue or cease the operation. At this time, the tandem mode is not released.

If temporary suspension in the secondary copier takes a long time, the Allocation recovery mode will activate, enabling the primary copier to handle the remaining print quantity.

2. Touch CONTINUE to go on, or EXIT to delete all the data transmitted

to the secondary copier and to release the tandem mode. The primary copier will take over the remaining print quantity and complete the job.

Once the Allocation recovery mode is activated and the primary copier is already handling the remaining print quantity, the secondary copier cannot continue with the tandem printing job, even when CONTINUE is touched on the popup menu. 7-31

Using Two Copiers in Tandem (continued) Troubleshooting Copying with the Allocation recovery mode: The Allocation recovery mode enables you to complete your copying job even when trouble occurs in either the primary or secondary copier, such as a paper jam. In that case, the copier that is trouble free completes the job.

The copier is initially set to activate this function. Contact your service representative, if you do not require this function. When a paper jam, SC-code (E-code, F-code) trouble or unloaded paper occurs on either the primary or secondary copier: The copier that is trouble free handles the remaining print quantity and completes the job. When the job is completed, take the appropriate troubleshooting measures to correct the problem. When memory overflow occurs on either the primary or secondary copier: On the primary copier The scanning job will stop immediately, and the tandem copying job will be suspended on both copiers. At this time, the tandem mode is not released. Take the same measure to be applied for single copier referring to p. 5-11 - p. 5-12. On the secondary copier The secondary copier will start the tandem copying job when the memory becomes available after completing some reserve jobs. In this case, the Allocation recovery mode functions to continue the tandem printing job on the primary copier until the secondary copier becomes available for the job. If the memory of the secondary copier cannot be available despite the elapse of time, the tandem mode will be released on the secondary copier, and the Allocation recovery mode functions to complete the job on the primary copier. When the power is turned off on either the primary or secondary copier: The tandem mode will be released automatically in either case. Restart the procedure from the first step. 7-32

• Special Original How to Make a Copy of Special Original Specifying Original Direction p. 8
• -2 Selecting Original Binding Direction 8-4 Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/Photo Enhance) ……. 8-6 Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) p. 8
• -8 Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original) p. 8
• -10 Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form) -12 Original Direction Original Binding Directon TextPholo Enhance Mixed Original ZFoided! Original Original Form p. 8

Specifying Original Direction Specity the direction of the originals placed on RADPF or platen glass. This setting is required to obtain copy results as expected when making double-sided copies with binding position specified or when staple position is specified. Originals on RADF: Originals on platen glass:

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed. Q Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch to highlight the desired original direction key.

Select condition Lo scan originals ER

Specifying Original Direction (continued

4. Make other compatible selections. (Original

5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

6. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass according to the original direction specified in step 2. HINT See the illustration on previous page, and p. 3-2 to p. 8-5 for details on positioning originals.

Gina Z. Press [START]. VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 8-3

Selecting Original Binding Direction When copying in 2-1 or 2-2 mode, specify the binding direction of the origi- nals on the Special Original popup menu to obtain the desired copy result. RIGHT&LEFT BINDING is initially selected to make copies in the same direction as the originals.

1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed. Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch to highlight the desired binding direction key.

Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen. The SPECIAL ORIGINAL key on the Basic Screen is highlighted. Position original in the RADF

4. Make other compatible selections.

Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

Selecting Original Binding Direction (continued)

6. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. CZ nr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Original Binding Directon Tex/Phot 8-5

Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/ Photo Enhance) Use this function to enhance the reproducibility of half tones so that the copy quality more closely matches to that of the original. Text Mode Use the Text mode when copying a text original. In this mode, text is improved in comparison to using the general mode. Photo Mode Use the Photo mode to reproduce a half-tone photo image. The copy will closely represent the half-tones of the original image. Increase Contrast Mode Select Increase Contrast to darken lighily printed images (e.g., pencil) without changing background exposure. In cases where the image is light and background is dark, the background will not be changed.

In each enhance mode, the copy density level can be shifted three levels darker or three levels lighter (Density Shift). See p. 3-20 if this setting is desired. >>>Specifications for Text/Photo Enhance<<< OIncompatible Copying Conditions: None de 4 Original Auomode Potomode | (RC |+ ARC

FGHIJK FGHIJK | | FGHIJK

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed. ( Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 8-6

Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/Photo Enhance) (continued)

2. Touch Text Photo, or Increase Contrast, as required.

4. Select additional copying features, as desired.

5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

TextPholo HINT Enhance See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

6. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. CL mrs + See p. 3-2 to p. 8-5 for details on positioning originals. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count Speélal exceeds 100. Original Z. Press [START]. AN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 8-7

Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) Use the Mixed original mode with the document feeder or with Store mode to copy mixed size originals. Each original in the mixed set will be copied to paper of the same size (APS mode) or to paper of desired size with appropriate ratio automatically selected (AMS mode). >>>Specifications for Mixed Original<<< 9 Use RADF. O Combination of original sizes to be mixed depends on the width of the RADF original guides. See p. 11-9 to p. 11-10 for details. 9 Incompatible Conditions: Staple-Sort with APS, Rotation Sort, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Punch using PK-110 Punching kit (B6R mixed and/or selecting APS mode), Z-Folded Original, Non STD Size, Tab Paper, Sheet/ Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Overlay, Storing image in Overlay Memory APS mode Automatically select the paper of the same size as that of the original. Automatically select magnification ratio Mixed size originals to copy onto the same paper in size.

1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed. ( Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 8-8

Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) (continued)

4. Select additional copying features, as desired.

APS is automatically selected on the Basic Screen. To select AMS, touch the tray key on the Basic Screen to select the è à Med desired paper size. = Original

5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 avr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

6. Position mixed original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder. md

CL mrs + See p. 3-8 for details on positioning originals. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds 100.

VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 8-9

Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original) Use the Z-folded original mode with the document feeder to copy Z-folded originals. Otherwise, the size detection sensor of the RADF may function incorrectly. This mode requires more scanning time to detect the original size. >>>Specifications of Z-Folded Original<<< 9 Use RADF. 9 incompatible Conditions: Using platen glass, Mixed Original, Non STD Size, Tab Paper, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Storing image in Overlay Memory Z-folded original

1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed. Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

4. Select additional copying features, as desired.

Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original) (continued

5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

CT mr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

Normal originals can also be loaded at the same time. CL rs + See p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds 100.

VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shfit tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. ÈS dal Ofgnal 8-11

Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form) The copier usually detects the standard size of originals fed through RADF or positioned on the platen glass (STD size mode). Use Non STD size mode to specify the scanning area manually for copying or printing special size originals. Use Tab paper mode to copy a tabbed original, including the image of the tab part, onto tabbed copy paper. >>>Specifications of Original Form<<< OTab extension width: 12.5 mm or less Oincompatible with Non STD Size: Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Storing image in Overlay Memory Olincompatible with FULL AREA: Combination, Booklet, Dual Page, Non- Image Area Erase, Image Shift Qincompatible with Tab Paper: Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Non STD Size, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Inter- leave, Image Insert, Dual Page, Storing image in Overlay Memory

1. Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed. qi Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form) (continued)

When selecting FULL AREA on the Non STD size mode menu, the copier scans the whole area of the platen glass and copies with the paper size or magnification ratio currently selected.

4. Touch OKonthe popup menu to complete the setting.

The popup menu will disappear.

5. Touch OKto complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.

CL rs + To load tabbed copy paper in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, specify the paper type as Tab paper. See p. 3-29 to p. 3-32. To load tabbed copy paper in any other tray, specify the paper type as Tab paper in the Key Operator mode. See p. 13-23 to p. 13-24. + For the procedure of tabbed copy paper supply, see p. 2-31 to p. 2-

7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. Original

HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. °2 pecial Original

8. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder, or FACE .

DOWN on the platen glass. CL mrs + See p. 3-8 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds 100.

AN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied 8-13

• Select Application Function SECTION Applications How to Use Application Functions To Display Application Selection Screen …… Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet)…. Copying onto Transparent Films (OHP Interleave)
• …… Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job) … -26 Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase) p. 9
• Reversing Colour in Black and White Image (Reverse Image) Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode). Repeating Automatically Or Selecting Repeating Times(Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode) p. 9
• -86 Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure).9-39 Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout) 9-42 Printing Images Fully to the Edges (Full-Image Area) p. 9
• -44 Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) … Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) .…. Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) 9-61 Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory) -64 Application Selection Screen Sheet/Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet oHP Interieave Image Insert Dual Page Program Job Non-mage Area Erase Reverse Image Applications Repeat Frame/Fold Erasure AUTO Layout Ful-image Area Image Shift Reduce & Shift Stamp Overlay Overlay Memory p. 9

To Display Application Selection Screen Follow the procedure below to display the Application Selection Screen and select the desired copying features.

+ When a function key is touched, it becomes highlighted. If you touch a function key, another screen or two will display to enable you to enter the appropriate settings. + Check BOOK MARKin the message area of the subsequent screen, if desired, so that the screen may be directly accessed from the Check Screen to change the setting you made. +_Ifone function on the menu is incompatible with another, it will appear dimmed. + The APPLICATION key on the Basic Screen will be highlighted when application selections have been made. Image Insert Image Sir rg _ (lEbçE]) To restore the original copying conditions, touch CANCEL. To clear all Application settings, touch ALL CLEAR.

2. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

Selections will be completed and the Basic Screen will be restored. qi) Please Be Reminded! With the Basic Screen displayed, you can press [START] to perform the operation. 9-2

Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Inser- tion) Use Sheet/Cover Insertion in copy mode or blank mode to insert chapter sheets or separator sheets into the finished set, as well as front and back covers. >>>Specifications for Sheet/Cover Insertion<<< Use RADF. OTrays for copy paper, front/back covers, and insertions should have the same paper size loaded. AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) is automatically selected. OMax. insert sheets: 30 locations, from 1-999, including front and back covers r incompatible Conditions: APS, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotaion Group, Punch LES. with PK-110 Punching kit, Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Combination, Booklet, lex OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Non-image Area Insertion Erase, Repeat except 2/4/8 Repeat, AUTO Layout, Overlay, Storing image in Overlay Memory

Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) (continued)

1. Load regular sheets into any tray, and insertion sheets and covers

into each tray source to be designated on the Sheet/Cover Inser- tion Screen.

+ _ When using thick paper or tabbed paper for covers or insertions, load them in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, unless previously specified and loaded in any other tray. + Be sure that the trays for copy paper, front/back covers, and inser- tions should have the same paper size loaded.

2. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

( Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

FILE EDIT. IMAGE EDIT

x 0 Image Shift The Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen will be displayed.

4. Select the desired cover mode.

Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) (continued)

Touch CHANGE COVERS TRAY to select the cover sheet tray source. The tray source for covers currently selected is displayed on the Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen. Every touch of the key shifts the selection in the display that includes paper type as specified in Key Operator mode. If no insertion is desired, proceed to step &. When selecting Insertion mode: Enter the page number. FRE Sheet Ven press OK Ces 15/0 Imsartionl FRONT COPY ] FRONT BLANK

COVERS TRAY INSERTION RAY

Touch to select the desired insertion mode, then use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of insertion location. Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key. To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The insertion location will be deleted. en HINT See p. 9-6 for details on entering page numbers. Touch CHANGE INSERTION TRAY to select the insertion tray source. The tray source for covers currently selected is displayed on the Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen. Every touch of the key shifts the selection in the display that includes paper type as specified in Key Operator mode. When all settings are completed, touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. C2 HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. 9-5 Sheet/Cover Insertion Applications

Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) (continued)

10. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

C2 HINTS + For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds 100.

9-6 VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Q FOR DETAILS: Entering Page Numbers Fifteen keys are displayed on the screen to designate each insertion location. When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move io the next page. The first (upper left) key displays the Front Cover icon if selected. The Back Cover icon appears, if selected, as the last (fixed) key, with one active blank key preceding it. Example: If p. 4 is entered in blank mode, a blank sheet will be inserted between p. 4 and p. 5; in copy mode, a copied sheet is inserted at p. 4. NOTES: + _ The page numbers entered at random will be sorted automatically. + Entering “0” or the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen. + When a page number entered is larger than the total original page count, it will be ignored.

Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) Chapter is used with RADF in 1-2 mode for the purpose of locating title pages on the right side, rather than reverse side, of a duplex copy to improve the presentation of double-sided copies. To effectively locate the title page on the right, a blank sheet will be automatically created on the reverse side of a sheet, if required. >>>Specifications for Chapter<<< Use RADF. OMax. title pages: 30 sheets, from 1 - 999 Use STAMP together with this function to print chapter number onto chapter page in addition to page number, numbering, or watermark numbering. See p. 9-52 to p. 9-60. Sheet/Cover Dincompatible Conditions: 1-1, 2-2, 2-1, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, #12 Face Up, Punch with PK-110 Punching kit (when selecting Copy Insertion Chapter mode), Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Combination, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Program Job, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Storing image in Over- lay Memory Copies in Chapter mode 1-sided originals Title pages Title pages

1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

Applications qi Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch Chapter on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function HE 1! fou JE Cranter _ À] e a vom Eu The Chapter Insertion Setting No. Screen will be displayed. 9-7

Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) (continued)

3. Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of each

title page. Lcraper PAGE SETTING (Entor by koypad) FUNCTION Chapter node CRE Enter page number by keypad Cher Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key. When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the next page. To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The entered number will be deleted.

+ Entering “0” or the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen. + _ Chapter insertions occur in sequence even if original page numbers are entered out of sequence. + When a page number is larger than the total original page count, insertion occurs as the last page of the document. Où OPTION Touch Booklet on the Chapter Insertion Setting No. Screen to use this function. To change the selection of paper tray for copying title pages, touch Copy Insertion on the screen. In this case, you can touch CHANGE OF THE INSERTION TRAY io change the currently selected paper tray dis- played on the screen. INSERTION TRAY

4. When all entries are made, touch OK.

The Application Selection Screen will be restored.

5. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. 9-8

Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) (continued)

6. Enterthe desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

7. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

C2 HINTS + For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-4. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds 100.

À cauTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 9-9 Chapter Applications

Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) Use this function to lay out and copy a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper (2in 1, 4in1,or8in1). >>>Specifications for Combination<<< Use RADF. DAMS is automatically selected. (Normally the fixed size of Tray 1 will be selected.) Oincompatible Conditions: APS, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Dual page, Program Job, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Storing image in Overlay Memory …. 4 in 1 copying Original COMBINATION BRIE 1 2 8 in 1 copying L 2 8 | 4

1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

ÿ Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) (continued)

Touch 2in 1, 4in 1or 8in 1 in the desired order area, referring to the illustra- tion on the following page.

The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Combination

5. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. Position original in the RADF

(au vdi AMS is automatically selected. When selecting any tray other than the one that is set and displayed on the Basic Screen, touch the desired tray key. ‘Applications

6. Select the desired original direction.

Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Orig- inal popup menu. Touch to select the desired original direction, then touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. 9-11

Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) (continued)

7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

8. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

C2 HINTS + For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-4. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds 100.

À cauTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Q FOR DETAILS: Original Type and Layout Order Refer to the table below to select the desired Combination mode. Lt Horizontal order Vertical order Gel 2int 4int 8int 4int 8int Portrait type 121314 1EE4 112 56[7[8 214168 3 |4 2 |4 Landscape type 1[2 1 [5 comen 1 112 3 [4 113 2 6 2 314 [5s|6l{2/4l)sl7 7 [8 as 9-12

Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) Use the Booklet to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides of paper from any tray unless it is specified as Thick or Tab paper of the paper type in the Key Operator mode. Original images are scanned into memory and automatically arranged in booklet format in correct order. >>>Specifications for Booklet<<< Use RADF. Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in 2-2 mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last. DAMS is automatically selected. Select the desired paper size. Original size: A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, or B5 incompatible Conditions: APS, 1-1, 2-1, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Punch with PK-110 Punching kit (when selecting Cover Sheet mode), Face Up, Cover sheet feeder with Cover mode in Booklet, Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, OHP Interleave, Program Job, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Storing image in Overlay Memory 1-sided originals Ÿ H H t XL: [7 dE 724 2-sided originals ‘ | | F l

Load Copy Paper. Load A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, or B5 copy paper in a tray. When selecting cover sheet mode (Cover with Copy sheet or Cover with Blank sheet), load the same size paper in any other tray unless it is specified as Thick or Tab paper of the paper type in the Key Operator mode. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. Q Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 9-13 Combination Booklet Applications

Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) (continued)

Booklet: node ÉnE 2 Booklet OUTPUT MODE Output ton BOOKLET. COVERS TRAT Ë = = Tray 1 GOLOUR co Cover N ver with vain + cover "Copy shoot Blank shoot CHANGE CHANGE COVERS TRay OUTPUT MODE. When a cover sheet is required, touch CHANGE COVERS TRAY to select the cover sheet tray source. Touch CHANGE OUTPUT MODE is you want to change the output order.

The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Select additional Applications, as desired. C2 nr Key Operator can set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbing in Stamp. See p. 13-39 to p. 13-46.

6. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. AMS is selected automatically.

7. Selectthe tray in which you loaded copy paper in step 1.

To release AMS, select the desired magnification, then select paper size. 9-14

Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) (continued)

If the copier is equipped with FS-210 Finisher, Fold or Stitch&Fold out- put mode is available. Follow the procedure on p. 9-16 to use the func- tion.

9. Enterthe desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 avr See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

10. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

C2 mwrs + For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-4. + Use RADF store mode (p. 3-33 to p. 3-34) when the original count exceeds 100. (Q) Please Be Reminded! Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in 2-2 mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last. î Please Be Reminded! When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity: Fold mode 12 pages or less for simplex copying 6 pages or less for duplex copying Stitch&Fold mode 80 pages or less for simplex copying 40 pages or less for duplex copying Exeeding the above limits on capacity may cause misfeeds in the fin- isher.

À CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease operating. To avoid such trouble, select an appropriate print quantity from the specifications on p. 11-3. The roller drive unit is located inside the Booklet tray of the fin- isher. DO NOT put your hand into the roller drive unit when removing folded or stapled & folded sheets; otherwise, you may 9-15 Booklet Applications

Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) (continued) À FOR DETAILS: Selecting Fold / Stitch&Fold Mode 1 Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch MAIN TRAY to highlight it. 2 Touch Stitch&Fold or FOLD, as desired. finisher mode OUEEUT HERU NOTE: Selecting FOLD or Stitch&Fold will automatically switch the output tray to Booklet tray. Notice that the arrow shown beside the Main tray shifts to the Booklet tray. 3 Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu. The Basic Screen will be restored with the OUTPUT MENU highlighted. 9-16

Copying onto Transparent Films (OHP Interleave) Use the OHP Interleave function in 1-1 or 2-1 mode to copy onto overhead projection transparent films, and output a blank or copied interleaf sheet with each copied transparent film. In the Blank sheet interleaving mode, a blank interleaf sheet is output with each transparent film to keep the film material from sticking together. In the Copy sheet interleaving mode, a copied interleaf sheet is output with each transparent film to provide reference during a presentation; a medium for photocopying; and a set for filing or inserting into a binder. >>>Specifications for OHP Interleave<<< OTransparent film source: Multi-sheet bypass tray O Print quantity: 1 OFinisher cannot be used. DAMS is automatically selected. incompatible Conditions: APS, 1-2, 2-2, Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch&Fold, Three-Fold, Cover sheet feeding, Punch, Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combina- tion, Booklet, Image Insert, Program Job, Repeat, Overlay, Storing image in Booklet Overlay Memory, Tandem mode OHP Interleave Blank interleaf sheets Copied interleaf sheets Transparent films Transparent films ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD, = |ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD Original Blank Sheet Interleaving Copy Sheet Interleaving Applications

1. Insert a sheet of transparent film into the Multi-sheet bypass tray.

( Please Be Reminded! Do not load transparent films into any other tray.

2. Wheninterleaf sheet is needed, load copy paper in any other tray

to match the size of transparent films.

3. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

qi) Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 9-17

Copying onto Transparent Films (OHP Interleave) (continued)

The Basic Screen will be restored.

+ AMS is selected automatically. To release AMS, select the desired magnification. +_ Print quantity is already set to 1. You cannot enter any other quantity.

7. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. C2 HINTS For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-5.

Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) Use the Image insert mode to combine images scanned from the platen glass, such as photos, paste-ups, newspaper articles, graphs, etc., with images scanned from the document feeder. Then, output the combined images as a finished set. The selected copy paper size is determined by the size of originals loaded in the document feeder. >>>Specifications for Image Insert<<< D Use RADF and platen glass. OMax. image insert: 30 locations, from p. 1 to p. 999 Oincompatible Conditions: Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Orig- inal, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, OHP Interleave, Dual Page, Program Job, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Overlay, Storing image in Overlay Memory 1-sided originals placed on RADF

Image Insert 2-sided originals ÿ placed on RADF

) Please Be Reminded! Applications When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch Image Insert on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function fm se" D me DD The Image Insertion No. Setting Screen will be displayed. 9-19

Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) (continued)

3. Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number.

E CE Enter page number by keypad Man _Japprieation image Insert PAGE SEL TING (Entor b; Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key. When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the next page. To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The entered page number will be deleted. ER HINT See p. 9-21 for detailed example. D oprion Touch Booklet on the Image Insertion No. Setting Screen to use this function.

4. When all page number entries are made, touch OK.

The Application Selection Screen will be restored.

5. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. The STORE key on the Basic Screen appears highlighted to show that the Store mode is automatically selected.

6. Enterthe desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

7. Scan the document feeder images:

Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder. If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the first page.

The originals positioned in the document feeder will be scanned into memory. 9-20

Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) (continued)

Scan the platen glass images. Open the document feeder. Position an original FACE DOWN on the platen glass, then close the document feeder. () Please Be Reminded! PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS ACCORDING TO PAGINATION. Press [START]. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals. HINTS + Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-11 to p. 5-12. + Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your service representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode. Image Insert Press [START]. The copier will start printing when ready for output. AN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Applications Q FOR DETAILS: Entering Page Numbers For example, if insertion locations are [2/2/6], scanned platen images will be inserted as follows: The first scanned platen image will be inserted after page 2. The second scanned platen image will be inserted directly after the first scanned Image insertion. The third scanned platen image will be inserted after page 6. NOTES: + When a page number is larger than the total original count, a sheet is inserted as the last page. + _ Insertions occur in sequence, even if page numbers are entered out of sequence. + Entering the same page number twice will insert two sheets at that location. 9-21

Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) The Dual Page mode performs image division on the original image. Use this function to copy an open book or a A3/B4 size sheet onto two A4/B5 sheets in 1-1 or 2-1 mode, or onto the front and back sides of one A4/B5 sheet in 1-2 or 2-2 mode. The following three modes can be selected from the Dual Page Screen.

• Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the first scan. + Front Cover+Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the second scan, after the first scan copies normally. + Front/Back Cover+Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the third scan, after the first and second scan copy normally. >>>Specifications for Dual Page<<< {Store mode is automatically selected. O Paper size: A4, B5 Oincompatible Conditions: APS, AMS, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch&Fold without Booklet selected, Three-Fold, Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Image Insert, Program Job, Repeat, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Overlay, Storing image in Overlay Memory Set original 1-1/2-1 mode 1-2/2-2 mode

1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

î Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 9-22

Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) (continued)

2. Touch Dual Page on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function more PE a ll The Dual Page Screen will be displayed.

according to the original pagenation. D orrion Touch Booklet on the Dual Page Screen to use this function. Applications

The Application Selection Screen will be restored.

6. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. APS and AMS are automatically released, and the STORE key appears high- lighted to show that the Store mode is automatically selected. 9-23

Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) (continued)

9-24 Select the desired copy mode, magnification, and paper size.

+ Available paper size is A4 or B5. + When selecting Facing pages mode and scanning from the platen glass, select 1-1 or 1-2 copy mode. + _ APS and AMS are released and 1.00 magnification is selected auto- matïically. Change the magnification manually, if desired. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s). When using platen glass to scan, position the first page FACE DOWN with document feeder kept open. When using document feeder, position original(s) FACE UP. For details on scanning originals in Front cover + Facing pages and Front/ Back Cover + Facing pages mode, see the description on the following page. Press [START] to scan. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals. î Please Be Reminded! When using platen glass, Non-Image Area Erase and AUTO Layout are automatically selected. DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode. Press [START]. The copier will start printing when ready for output. À CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) (continued) Q Scanning Original for Cover Use platen glass for scanning original for cover. 1 Openthe document feeder. 2 Position original for front cover FACE DOWN on the platen glass. 3 Press [START] to start scanning. 4 When Front/Back Cover + Facing pages is selected, scan original for back cover according to the above steps 2 and 3. 5 Use platen glass or document feeder, as required, for scanning body text originals. To output the set in the same order as the originals, start scanning from the first page. 6 Press [START] to start scanning. 7 Repeai steps 5 and 6 for subsequent originals. Front cover + Facing pages LS z KN [Ex Scan trom ss NN first page RE A —+ À : Copies. Front/Back cover + Facing pages N |: ; Pet — LL bar Scan from N » first page Dual Page Ù Applications Copies Scan front cover Scan body text Front/Back cover + Facing pages LS 3 Lim

Scan front cover Scan back cover Scan body text NOTES: + Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-11 to p. 5-12. + When using platen glass, Non-Image Area Erase and AUTO Layout are automatically selected. DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job. 9-25

Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job) In the ordinary Store mode, the combined features selected for the job are applied to all originals to be scanned. In the Program Job mode, you may scan multiple sets of originals and apply different settings on each set (referred to as JOB), then output them all as a complete set. >>>Specifications for Program Job<<< OMax. 100 JOBs can be programmed for an output job. Once specified, paper size and the paper type/size setting for Multi-sheet bypass tray cannot be changed for another JOB. Output mode and print quantity setting cannot be specified for each JOB. The last setting made will be applied to all JOBs. 9 Program Job settings cannot be stored in Job Memory. incompatible Conditions: APS, Change paper size, Rotation, Group, Rota- tion Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch&Fold, Punch with PK-110 Punching kit, Three-Fold, Server function except Image Store & Output mode, Mixed Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Inter- leave, Image Insert, Dual Page, 2/4/8 Repeat in Repeat, Overlay, Storing image in Overlay Memory Copied set

9-26 Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. ) Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job) (continued)

Are: Repoat + MU} mage sh The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.

3. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. The STORE key on the Basic Screen appears highlighted to show that the Store mode is automatically selected.

4. Select the desired copy conditions.

5. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. If the number of document feeder originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the first Ferre page.

The paper size determined at this time will be applied to all subsequent JOBs. When scanning for the current JOB is completed, the popup menu will be dis- played in the Basic Screen. Applications

Press START to scan or iginals Please press STORE by scanning conplete ri o

CANCEL ] This DB is cancel led SORT The current JOB images will be stored. To delete the images, touch CANCEL. 9-27

Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job) (continued)

8. Repeat steps 4to 7 until all JOB originals are scanned.

W Please Be Reminded! PLACE AND SCAN EACH ORIGINAL SET IN THE CORRECT ORDER OF PAGINATION. C2 HINTS + Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-11 to p. 5-12. + Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your service representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine.

9. Select the desired output mode and enter the print quantity from

the control panel keypad. HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 9-28

Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase) The Non-image area erase mode is used to copy non standard or special originals, such as books, magazines, paste-ups, graphs, thick or thin materials, etc. from the platen glass. The exposed glass area outside the borders of the original will not be copied. >>>Specifications for Non-Image Area Erase<<< Use the platen glass only. Keep RADF open throughout the procedure. Olincompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 2-2, 2-1, APS, AMS, Rotation, Rota- tion Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page in RADF Store mode, Reverse Image, Full-Image Area, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Storing image in Overlay Memory s | IC General copying DLL | QUES Non-Image Area Erase Set original

1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

() Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch Non-image Area Erase on the Application Selection Screen.

ASIE The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity. 9-29 Program Job Non-mage Area Erase Applications

Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase) (continued)

3. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored.

4. Select magnification and paper size, as desired.

+ _ APS and AMS are automatically released. + Copy mode is automatically set to 1-1. When selecting 1-2 mode, Platen store mode will function automatically.

5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

6. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.

) Please Be Reminded! DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT FEEDER. Original size should be larger than 10 mm x 10 mm.

X FOR DETAILS: Oblique Erase and Rectangle Erase Modes The Non-image area erase has two modes; Rectangle erase mode and Oblique erase mode. The copier is initially set to select either mode appropriate for the original placed on the platen glass (AUTO mode). Key Operaïor can specify either mode and the original density level manually so that the Non-Image Area Erase functions without fail. See p. 13-56. Oblique erase mode Rectangle erase mode Having Any Problem? This function may perform incorrecily if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service repre- sentative about an appropriate place for installation. 9-30

Reversing Colour in Black and White Image (Reverse Image) Use Reverse image to reverse the image from black-on-white to white-on- black, and vice versa. This is very good for copying white-on-black originals and reversing them ready to fax. >>>Specifications for Reverse Image<<< incompatible Conditions: Fold, Stitch&Fold, Three-Fold, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Full-Image Area, Stamp, Overlay ABCD ABCD à ABCD ABCD ABCD Original Reverse Image copying

1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

() Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. Non-Image Area Erase

Écembination [14] {Dual Page EE + Booklet ASIE The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.

3. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. 9-31

Reversing Colour in Black and White Image (Reverse Image) (continued)

4. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

en) HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

5. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. HINT For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-5.

VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 9-32

Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert/ Horiz. Mode) Use this function to repeat the selected image area of 10 mm - 150 mm in both vertical and horizontal widths measured from the rear left corner of the A3 original area indicated on the left edge of the platen glass. >>>Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting Mode Specifications<<< Use the platen glass. (Document feeder cannot be used.) incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 2-2, 2-1, APS, AMS, Rotation, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Stamp/Overlay | Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting mode| Repeat copy Horizontal width |, . ZA ABABAB | Vertical LT" ABABAB ABABAB

1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

Reverse Image î Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

The Repeat Mode Selection Screen will be displayed. 9-33

Repeating Selected Image Area (Repea ert./Hori Mode) (continued)

The Application Selection Screen will be restored.

5. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored.

6. Select the desired magnification and paper size.

+ APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.00 (100%) is selected as a magnification ratio. + Copy mode is automatically set to 1-1. When selecting 1-2 mode, Platen store mode will function automatically. 9-34

Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode) (continued)

7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

en) HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

8. Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.

HINT See the illustration on p. 9-33 for details.

VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 9-35

Repeating Automatically Or Selecting Repeating Times(Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode) Auto Detection mode will automatically set the equal repeat area to the size of the original placed onto the platen glass by activating Non-image area erase. Repeat mode will scan the image area specified by the selected paper size and mode (2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat), then arrange the image by specified times in one copy sheet. >>>Auto Detection/ Repeat Mode Specifications<<< OAuto Detection Mode: Use the platen glass. RADF cannot be used. ORepeat Mode Magnification ratio: 1.00 (100 %) fixed Oincompatible Conditions with Auto Detection Mode Using RADF, 2-2, 2-1, APS, AMS, Rotation, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Dual Page, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Full-Image Area, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Stamp/Overlay Oincompatible Conditions with Repeat Mode APS, AMS, Rotation (if magnification is changed from 1.00), Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Overlay, Overlay Memory Auto Detection mode / ABCDABCD ABCD ABCD | ABCD ABCD Copy Repeat mode ABCD co BCD BCD (2 Repeat) ABCD CD CD Copy BCD BCD (4 Repeat)

Repeating Automatically Or Selecting Repeating Times(Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode) (continued)

1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

W Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch Repeat on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function IMAGE EDIT. The Repeat Mode Selection Screen will be displayed.

The Application Selection Screen will be restored.

Non-Image Area Erase is automatically selected on the Application Selection Screen when AUTO mode is selected. HINT When 2 Repeat mode is selected, Page space function of Image Shift can be used to make the desired amount of blank space between the two images on a page. See p. 9-46 to p. 9-48. 9-37

Repeating Automatically Or Selecting Repeating Times(Repeat: AUTO/ Repeat Mode) (continued)

5. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored.

6. Select the desired magnification and paper size.

+ APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.00 (100%) is selected as a magnification ratio. + When 2 Repeai, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat is selected, the scanning area Will be a portion of the selected paper size equally divided according to the selected mode. In this case, magnification ratio will be fixed to 1.00 (100%). + Copy mode is automatically set to 1-1. When selecting 1-2 mode, Platen store mode will function automatically.

7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

C2 HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

8. Position original.

For AUTO mode original, open the document feeder, then position the original FACE DOWN on the platen glass. For 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat or 8 Repeat mode original, RADF is also available. C2 HINT See the illustration on p. 9-36 for details. î Please Be Reminded! When AUTO mode is selected, Non-Image Area Erase functions automatically. DO NOT close the document feeder.

VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

The AUTO mode may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation. 9-38

Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders Frame/Fold Erasure Use Frame/Fold Erasure to eliminate black copy marks along borders to clean up and improve the presentation of the copy. >>>Specifications for Frame/Fold Erasure<<< Oincompatible Conditions: Repeat, Full-Image Area

) Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

me DD The Frame/Fold Erasure Selection Screen will be displayed. 9-39

Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/Fold Erasure) (con- tinued)

3. Touchto highlight the desired mode key.

Select frane erasure anount (1-S00nn) ET EU and/or fold erasure anount {1-99nn) Application Frames Fod Touch Frame Erasure (All sides), Frame Erasure (Each side), or Fold Era- sure to highlight it. Either Frame erasure mode and Fold erasure can be selected in combination.

The Application Selection Screen will be restored.

6. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored.

7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

8. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. en] HINT Applications For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-5. Q FOR DETAILS Frame/Fold When lowering the document feeder onto thick original (e.g. open book), Fresue do not press it down too hard. Keep the document feeder open, if required.

VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 9-41

Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout) Use this function to detect the image area of the original and centre the whole image on the copy paper making it easy to copy small pieces of paper. >>>Specifications for AUTO Layout<<< ONon-Image Area Erase is automatically selected. Release it manually when using RADF to scan originals. incompatible Conditions: 2-2, 2-1, APS, AMS, Rotation, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter (available when Non-Image Area Erase is released manually), Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Reverse Image, Repeat, Full-Image Area, Image Shift, Overlay, Storing image in Overlay Memory

qi) Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

+ Non-Image Area Erase will be selected automatically. When using RADF to scan the original, touch to deselect this function. + When using Dual Page with this function, the original smaller than the selected paper size will be printed in the centre of the copy paper without image division performed. 9-42

Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout) (continued)

Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. Select the desired magnification and paper size on the Basic Screen.

+ APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.00 (100%) is selected as a magnification ratio. + Copy mode is automatically set to 1-1. When selecting 1-2 mode, Platen store mode will function automatically. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. 2 HINT For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-5. î Please Be Reminded! DO NOT close the RADF when Non-Image Area Erase is selected. Placing original obliquely on the platen glass may cause black copy marks. Press [START]. VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Q Having Any Problem? The AUTO layout function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation. 9-43 Applications AUTO Layout

Printing Images Fully to the Edges (Full-Image Area) Use this function to make copies printed completely to the edges. >>>Specifications for Full-Image Area<<< incompatible Conditions: Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure ABC Original Normal copy Full-mage Area copy

1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

di Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch Full-image Area on the Application Selection Screen.

RES The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.

3. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored.

4. Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

En) HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. 9-44

Printing Images Fully tothe Edges (Full Image Area) (continued)

6. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. C2 HINTS For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-5.

AN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Applications Ful-image Area 9-45

Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) Use Image Shift to adjust the position of copy images, e.g. for the purpose of creating a new binding margin on originals to make it easier for filing purposes. Page Space function is available only when Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected. Use this function to make the desired amount of blank space between the two images on a page. See the illustra- tion on p. 9-48 for details. If image loss is likely, select the Reduce & Shift mode instead of regular Image shift. See p. 9-49. >>>Specifications for Image Shift<<< OShift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments Setting in 0.1 mm increments using up/down arrow key is also available by Key Operator setting. See p. 13-39 to 13-46. Olincompatible Conditions: AUTO Layout, Storing images in Overlay Memory Right 2eeRt |'asen 1JKL|® EFGH MS IRL La hr PaRS Down

EFGH wWzvzi! MG md 1 Right —> PQRS ABCD | | TU V ere ABCD WZYZz PAYKL EFGH ms po) Le Hotpel PQRS L d LS | Er … llwzyz Copi <= Let opies

1. Select the copy mode and paper size from the Basic Screen, as

() Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 9-46

Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) (continued)

the shift direction and amount. RS NRES an — UN Gioue ee Ê ne CRT Eloi Touch FRONT or BACK to specify the shift direction and amount individually; or BOTH SIDES to specify collectively. The BACK and BOTH SIDES keys function only for duplex copying. Touch the desired shift direction key to highlight it, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount, from 0 mmto 250 mm in 1 mm increments. The image display on the screen allows you to view the shift direction and amount to be created on the printed sheets. Applications When Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected, the PAGE SPACE key appears clear on the screen to show its availability. Shift mode {setting range D-250nn) OUR. = Reduce shift nodel setting range O-250mm) D un Jhéorentron image Shift, Image Shift If desired, touch PAGE SPACE to highlight it, then enter the desired amount using the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key. 9-47

Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) (continued)

The Application Selection Screen will be restored.

6. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored.

7. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

2 HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

8. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. C2 HINT For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-5.

AN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Q FOR DETAILS: Page Space Function Page space Bookiet A B # |A B Original Page space 2 Repeat in Repeat Page space =) JT 9-48

Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) Use Reduce & Shift instead of regular Image Shift to prevent image loss when creating a binding margin. >>>Specifications for Reduce & Shift<<< DAMS is automatically selected and cannot be released. OShift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments Setting in 0.1 mm increments using up/down arrow key is also available by Key Operator setting. See p. 13-39 to 13-46. incompatible Conditions: Change magnification, V/H zoom, APS, Mixed Original, Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Over- lay, Storing image in Overlay Memory => Right Left = ABCDT 112345 EFGHI| ® 6789 JKLMN OPQR 10 11 12 S TU V| vom | 13 14 15 WXYZ|] [161718 Front

Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) (continued) Î1. Selectthe copy mode and paper size, as required.

2. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

() Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

4. Touch Reduce & Shift on the Image Shift Setting Screen, then

BOTH JfBIGHT Reduce, $ HIT, Ésnit Touch FRONT or BACK. in Reduce & Shift mode, the BOTH SIDES key appears dimmed to show inactivity. Touch the desired shift direction key to highlight it, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount, from 0 mmto 250 mm in 1 mm increments. The image display on the screen allows you to view the shift direction and amount to be created on the printed sheets.

The AMS will automatically determine the magnification ratio according to the shift amount specified for the front page. The shift amount and magnification ratio determined for the front page will be automatically applied to the back page. If any positioning adjustment is required, touch BACK and make direction and amount change. 9-50

Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) (continued)

Touch OK. The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. 2 HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. C2 HINT For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-5. Press [START]. VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 9-51 Applications Reduce & Shift

Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) This function allows you to print onto output copies the desired type of stamp, page number, numbering, and date/time at the location designated on the screen. The four stamp types and watermark (described in the next subsection) provided on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen can be used individually or in multiple combinations. >>>Specification for STAMP, SET NUMBERING, PAGE NUMBERING, DATE/TIME<<< To use STAMP, the optional HDD (HD-105) is required to be installed in the machine. Without HDD, this function key will be dimmed to show inactivity. incompatible Conditions: Reverse Image, Repeat except 2/4/8 Repeat, Overlay (with STAMP and SET NUMBERING), Overlay Memory Top-Left TMidde Tight

STAMP 002 / 005 SET NUMBERING [> CD cd Middle-Left Middle M-Flight PAGE NUMBERING "03/10/10 10:30AM (= D D DATETTIME LowerLeft L-Middie L-Right Printing positions

1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.

) Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 9-52

Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)

2. Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function ICombination The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed.

3. Touch to select the desired key in the STAMP area.

character size and printed page. Select desired STAMP function CosoT and press OK MARK application ShARAS Ten ‘FOR YOUR BUT. CENT

PRNTED PARE DRAFT DO NOT COPY

Touch to highlight the desired stamp key and printing position key on the screen. |f fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to dis- play the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 9-56 for details. Touch CHARACTER SIZE to select LARGER or SMALLER. Touch PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages. 9-53 Applications Stamp

Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) (continued) When selecting SET NUMBERING: Specify the numbering type, printing position, character size, printed page and starting No. ï ENT Sr des ed NUMBERIN& funct ion [DER pe LStamp/Cverteu

"CHARACTER SET NUMBERING

See 20 pt a001 , 0002 , 0003 1,2,3 PRINTED PAGE ALL PAGES SARINGNe | (0001/1000, 0002 /1000 Touch to highlight the desired numbering type key and printing position key on the screen. |f fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 9-56 for details. Touch CHARACTER SIZE to select 20 pt or 36 pt. Touch PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages. Touch STARTING No. to designate the starting number, if required. See p. 9- 56 for details. When selecting PAGE NUMBERING: Specify the page numbering type, printing position, character size, printed page and starting No. T cti or Sr des ed PAGE NUHBERING function ER Er LStamp/Cverteu

“CHARACTER PAGE NUMBERING

SE 14 pt TYPE GOTHIC Touch to highlight the desired page numbering type key and printing position key on the screen. |f fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSI- TION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 9-56 for details. Touch CHARACTER SIZE/TYPE to select the character size (8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt or 14 pt) and type (GOTHIC or MING). See p. 9-57 for details. Touch PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the front/back cover or insertions. See p. 9-57 for details. Touch STARTING No. to designate the starting number, if required. See p. 9- 56 for details. 9-54

Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) (continued) When selecting DATE/TIME: Specify the date/time type, printing position, character size and printed page. Sr des ed DATE/TIHE function FC Fox JTE LStamp/Cverteu PHINTNE POSMON se 8pt NO DISPLAY

PRINTED PAGE Re nr) Touch to highlight the desired date, time, and printing position keys on the screen. |f fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to dis- play the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 9-56 for details. Touch CHARACTER SIZE/TYPE to select the character size (8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt or 14 pt) and type (GOTHIC or MING). See p. 9-57 for details. Touch PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages.

The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be restored. Touch to select another stamp function key to use in combination, if desired.

6. Touch OKonthe Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.

The Application Selection Screen will be restored.

7. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored. Applications

8. Enterthe desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

9. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. C2 HINT For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-5. Stamp

Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) (continued) 9-56 VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Q FOR DETAILS: Fine Adjustment Setting Screen When FINE ADJ. OF POSITION is touched, the Fine Adjustment Set- ting Screen will be displayed. (à Function nt for printed Me position 13 moved from base point LP SE RIGHT SIDE. Touch UP SIDE, DOWN SIDE, RIGHT SIDE, or LEFT SIDE to specify the direction, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired amount, from 0 to 50 mm. Touch OKio return to the previous screen. Starting No. Setting Screen: Available from SET NUMBERING or WATER- MARK NUMBERING AUMBERINO Function EE Enter starting ruer CRE er Use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired starting number, then touch OKto return to the previous screen. Starting No. Setting Screen: Available from PAGE NUMBERING When Chapter is already selected, the chapter starting number can also be specified on the Starting No. Setting Screen. RING function CR Een “rap ESS Touch PAGE NUMBER or CHAPTER NUMBER to highlight it, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired starting number for each.

Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) (continued Use ++ to enter a minus . number to print from half- Originals way through, e.g. —2 to print “1” from page 4.

When “(+)2is entered: Touch OK to return to the previous screen. Copies Copies Character Size/Type Selection Screen: from PAGE NUMBERING or DATE/TIME When CHARACTER SIZE/TYPE is touched, the Character Size/Type Selection Screen will be displayed. MUNBERING #1 aracter Touch to select the desired key, then touch OK to return to the previous screen. Cover/Insert Print Setting Selection Screen: from PAGE NUMBERING When copied/blank insertion mode of Sheet/Cover Insertion has been already selected, this screen allows you to specify whether to print the page number on insertions, or skip them from the page count. Applications page to print Touch to select the desired key, then touch OK to retum to the Page Numbering Type Selection Screen. Stamp 9-57

Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) Use this function to print the desired letter type obliquely in the centre of the page (WATERMARK), or the numbers in the specified form repeatedly over the scanned image (WATERMARK NUMBERING). >>>Specification for WATERMARK and WATERMARK NUMBERING<<< OTo use WATERMARK, the optional HDD (HD-105) is required to be installed in the machine. Without HDD, this function key will be dimmed to show inactivity. incompatible Conditions: Reverse Image, Repeat except 2/4/8 Repeat, Overlay, Overlay Memory A Ac: 00 ru 001/100 001/100 RS ___001/100 —— Z oNHEN oo

() Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

2. Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function Pr Image Sir The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed. 9-58

Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)

3. Touch WATERMARK or WATERMARK NUMBERING, as desired.

type and density. Select desired HATERMARK function and press OK

POSITION Touch to highlight the desired watermark key and density key on the screen. If fine adjustment of the centred watermark position is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 9- 56 for details. When selecting WATERMARK NUMBERING: Specify the desired Applications watermark numbering type, density, character size and starting No. Si es es HATERMARK function ÉETEE 1 Stamp/ vera

Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) (continued)

The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be restored. Touch to select another stamp function key to use in combination, if desired.

6. Touch OKonthe Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.

The Application Selection Screen will be restored.

7. Touch OKonthe Application Selection Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored.

8. Enterthe desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

9. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. C2 HINT For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-5.

AN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 9-60

Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) Use this function to scan an image, then overlay the image onto each page copied in the job. >>>Specification for Overlay<<< {Store mode is automatically selected. incompatible Conditions: Rotation, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Dual page, Program Job, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, STAMP, SET NUMBERING, WATERMARK, WATERMARK NUMBERING Originals scanned Copies in Overlay mode 1st scanned original F 2nd and later ABCD 2

Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. î Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen. Select Application function ES! “ r-D Pr E | Cou A7 | rase DU ALL CLEAR

The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed. 9-61 Applications Stamp Overlay

Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) (contin-

9-62 ued Touch OVERLAY. et dosired Stamp/Overlay function n press OK STAMP WATERMARE OVERLAT. Touch OK on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen. The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored. The Store mode is automatically selected. Select the desired paper size and magnification on the Basic Screen. APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.00 (100%) is selected as a magnification ratio. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. C2 HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity. Position the overlaying original. Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. HINT For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-2 to p. 3-5. Press [START] to scan. The original image will be scanned into memory. Position the original(s) to be overlaid. Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.

Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) (contin- ued

11. Press [START] to scan.

12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for all originals.

13. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode, then press [START] to print.

VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. 9-63 Applications

Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory) Use Overlay Memory to scan and store several images in HDD, then recall the desired image from the HDD to overlay onto each page copied in the job. >>>Specification for Overlay Memory<<< OTo use this function, the optional HDD (HD-105) is required to be installed in the machine. Without HDD), this function key will be dimmed to show inactiv- ity. Olincompatible Conditions with Image Store: Using RADF, 1-2, 2-2, 2-1, AMS, Rotation, Reserve Mode, Interrupt Mode, Selecting Output Mode, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Stamp, Overlay incompatible Conditions with Output: Reverse Image, STAMP, SET NUMBERING, WATERMARK, WATERMARK NUMBERING in Stamp ABCD + Ce) Store in HDD Overlaying image Recall overlaying image ABCD

î Please Be Reminded! When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET]. 9-64

Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory) (continued)

2. Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.

Select Application function Area Image Shi Frametrois ©} (] 0 The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed.

(DRE tee 1 Stamp/ Over

Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory) (continued)

5. Enter the desired image name.

Enter max. B characters Lo image name ESC ul MARK Japptication 1-Stanp, vera IAGEOO! Use the touch screen keypad to enter the desired name up to 8 characters. The date when you made this entry will also be stored automatically. To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character, then enter the correct name.

6. If the image name is correct, touch OK.

The Basic Screen to store the overlaying image will be displayed. Select the desired copy conditions. HINT The popup menu may be displayed to prompt you that the entered image name has been already used. See p. 9-68 for details.

7. Position the overlaying original on the platen glass.

The document feeder cannot be used for storing the overlaying image.

8. Press [START] to scan.

The Overlaying Image Data Storing Screen will be displayed.

Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory) (continued) The machine automatically starts to store the overlaying image data in the HDD. The Overlaying Image Selection Screen will resume when the storing function is completed. To continue to store the overlaying image data, return to step 4.

9. Touch to select the desired overlaying image data, then touch OK.

(DRE tee 1 Stamp/ Over

The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be restored. X FOR DETAILS: Image Delete Key on the Overlay Image Selection Screen If the IMAGE DELETE key is displayed on the Overlay Image Selection Screen, you can delete the stored image and name. Select the image name using up/down arrow key to scroll, then touch IMAGE DELETE.

The Store mode is automatically selected, and APS and AMS are released. Set the desired conditions on the Basic Screen.

12. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. Applications

C2 HINT See p. 3-6 for details on setting print quantity.

13. Position the original(s) to be overlaid.

Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.

14. Press [START] to scan.

15. Repeat steps 13 and 14for all originals.

Storing an Overlay Image in HDD / Overlaying Image Stored in HDD (Overlay Memory) (continued) VAN CAUTION When the finisher / shift tray / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur. Q FOR DETAILS: Popup Menu for Name Duplication If the popup menu with YES and NO keys is displayed instead of the Basic Screen, the entered name is duplicated. Touch YES to enter a new name, or NO to create a duplicate name. PE Se

If the popup menu with OK key is displayed, the entered name is duplicated. Touch OK, then enter a new name. Changing the popup menu for duplicate name and displaying the IMAGE DELETE key is available in the Memory switch No. 41 of the Key Operator setting. See p. 13-39 - p. 13-46. 9-68

SECTION Network Function How to Use Server Functions and Web Utilities To Use Server Functions .….10-2 Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete)…...10-4 Storing Image Data While Copying (Image Store&Output) 10-16 Recalling Image Data from HDD/PC (Image Recall) 10-19 Editing Image Data Using PC (Image Edit) 10-23 To Use Web Utilities 10-26 To Display Information on Machine 10-28 To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status)... 10-29 Operating Image Data Stored in HDD (HDD Job Information) ….10-31 Setting E-Mail Transmission Function (Environment Setup) 10-35 Setting E.K.C. Function (Environment Setup) 10-37 Setting Scan Transmission Function (Environment Setup) 10-47 Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (Environment Setup) ..10-53 Server Functions Image Store/Delete Image Store&Ouut Image Recall Image Edit To Use Web Utities Machine Information Job Status HDD Job Information Environment Setup Network Function

To Use Server Functions Use the Server function with HDD to accumulate scanned images into built- in DIMM (memory), then store the image data in HDD (option) so that the data can be recalled to DIMM and output as needed. This function also allows you to store the image data for normal copying procedures. Use the Server function with PC to store the image data accumulated in built-in DIMM (memory) in PC, and transmit the image data to PC over a network. The image data can be recalled from PC to DIMM and output as needed. This function also allows you to edit the image data on PC and transmit the edited data to DIMM for printing. Even when the machine is connected with several PCs over a network, this function can be used with only one PC at a time.

+ Installation of the optional HDD (HD-105) is required for the Server function with HDD. + To use the Server function with PC, a PC must have a specific setup application installed. Two types of the setup application are provided. For detailed information, contact your service representative. =, =, ci) ra + Output + à — a —1 Server Function with HDD Server Function with PC DIMM DIMM Store Siore ] 4 Ÿ [Fecaï] LT The Server function provides the following four modes: (D Image Store/Delete mode Store the image data scanned from originals in HDD/PC, transmit the data from HDD to PC, or delete the data stored in HDD/PC. TMAGI STORE DELETE 10-22

To Use Server Functions (continued) @) Image Store & Output mode Store the scanned image data in HDD after copying is completed. Select finisher mode OUTPU

MENU, Functions Recall the image data stored in HDD/PC to built-in DIMM for printing. ER @) Image Edit mode Edit the image data by PC. "er setting menu of following modes SERVER Network "IMAGE Function Eat 10-3

Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) Use this function to store the image data into HDD/PC. In the event data is already stored in HDD/PC, use this function to transmit it from HDD to PC or delete it from HDD/PC.

+_ Installation of the optional HDD (HD-105) is required for storing data in the HDD. + To store data in PC, the machine should be connected to PC by cross-cable, or with network provided that a specific software for using Server function is installed in PC. + The above two conditions should be fulfilled for transmitting data from HDD to PC. To Store Image Data in HDD/PC Specify your password when storing the data in HDD/PC for protection. Image data can be given an alphabetical job name. >>>Specifications for Storing Image Data in HDD/PC<<< [incompatible Scanning Conditions: 1-2, 2-2, AMS, Selecting output mode, Selecting paper size (APS is automatically selected), Setting print quantity, Rotation, FULL AREA in Non STD Size, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job (available in Image Store&Output Mode only), Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Stamp/Overlay un I

Î1. Press [MODE] to light up the [SCAN/SERVER] LED. The Scan/Server Setting Menu Screen will be dis- played. 10-4

Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) (continued)

IMAGE STORE DELETE The Image Data Store/Delete Site Selection Screen will be displayed.

The Image Data Password Entry Screen will be displayed. HINTS + To store the image data in PC and io use the CHANGE DATA SEND SYSTEM key on the screen, follow the instruction according to the setup application installed in a PC. For detailed information, refer to the instruction of the setup application. + The image data stored in HDD can be duplicated in PC using a spe- cific backup tool. Contact your service representative, if desired.

4. Enter the desired image data password in up to 8 characters from

the touch screen keypad. étoe Server inage data store/delete node non Please enter passuord Inage store passhord(8) fe; To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character, then enter the correct password. 10-5

Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) (continued)

5. Ifthe password is correct, touch OK.

The Job Name Entry Screen will be displayed.

6. Enter the desired job name in up to 8 characters from the touch

screen keypad. Enter nax. 8 characters to name job

ABCDI111 2003/08/02 ERDHSSSS 2008/08/10 To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character, then enter the correct job name.

7. the job name is correct, touch OK.

The Scanner Setting Screen will be displayed.

If entered job name has already been used, the popup menu appears to ask you whether to rewrite the data or to re-enter new name. Touch YES to rewrite, or NO to create new name.

8. Select the desired Scanning conditions.

Press START to scan originals Position original in the RADF

Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) (continued)

Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. CZ nr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals. Press [START] to scan original(s). When scanning originals is completed, the machine automatically begins storing data in the HDD. If Store mode is used, touch to deselect STORE on the Scanner Setting Screen after all originals are scanned, then press [START]. When storing job is almost completed, SCANNER—HDD icon appears in the message area, then the Basic Screen will be restored automatically.

Key Operator can set the machine to restore the Job Name Entry Screen when the storing job is completed, so that the data storing can be continued. See p. 13-39 to p. 13-46 for details. In this case, the Image Data Storing Screen shown below will be dis- played while the image data is stored in HDD/PC. Pre On this screen, touch CANCEL to suspend the storing job, then touch YES on the popup menu to delete the data, or touch NO to continue. 10-7 Functions Image Store/Delete mage Recall nage Edi Information Job Status

Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) (continued) To Transmit Image Data from HDD to PC Use this function to transmit the image data from the HDD to a PC over a network to store the data in a PC. We recommend that you should make a copy of the image data stored to HDD perodically, just in case of trouble. >>>Specifications for Transmitting Image Data from HDD to PC<<< OTo transmit and store the image data in a PC, a PC must have a specific setup application installed. Follow the instruction according to the setup application installed on a PC. The data transmission procedure on a PC can be performed automatically by designating it on the touch screen of the machine. (In this case, the setup application installed in the PC should be the Job Editor Server. The Job Editor 2 allows manual transmission only.) OThe password specified when storing the data in HDD is required. The image data is to be specified by the given job name. un I

(0 LE Î1. Press [MODE] to light up the [SCAN/SERVER] LED. The Scan/Server Setting Menu Screen will be displayed. 10-8

Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) (continued)

IMAGE STORE DELETE The Image Data Store/Delete Site Selection Screen will be displayed.

The Image Data Password Entry Screen will be displayed.

+ The HDD-PC key on the Image Data Store/Delete Site Selection Screen initially indicates “MANUAL” to show that the manual setting on a PC is required to complete the data transmission procedure. Touch CHANGE DATA SEND SYSTEM to change “MANUAL” to “AUTOMATIC” to complete it automatically. See p. 10-11 for detail. + The initial setting of the data transmission procedure indicated on the HDD-—PC key can be changed from “MANUAL” to “AUTOMATIC”. Refer to the instruction of the setup application. Network Function 10-9

Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) (continued)

4. Enter your image data password from the touch screen keypad.

Server inage data store/delete mode Please enter passuord Image store passnord(£) see To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character, then enter the correct job name.

The Job Selection Screen will be displayed.

6. Touchthe desired job name key to highlight it.

At this time, the Image Data Transmitting Screen appears without the data transmission starting, if a data transmission procedure from the PC is required. In this case, perform the procedure on a PC. The data transmission will start. Now sending data to PC JOB : 0/1 PAGE : Of DELLE 10-10

Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) (continued)

+ For the data transmission procedure on a PC side, refer to the instruction of the setup application installed in the PC. + If TRANSMIT TO SERVER is selected on the Change Data Sending System Screen, any operation on a PC side is not required during the data transmission procedure but the Job Editor Server should be acti- vated in advance. For detailed information, refer to the instruction of the Job Editor Server. When the data transmission is completed, the popup menu will appear to ask whether you delete the data from HDD. Now sending data to PC JOB : 0/1 PAGE : Of Image Store/Delete Touch YES to delete the data from HDD, or touch NO to leave it in HDD. The Basic Screen will be restored. Q FOR DETAILS: Change Data Sending System Screen Specify MANUAL: OPERATE ON PC ior the PC with Job Editor 2 installed, or AUTOMATIC: TRANSMIT TO SERVER for the PC with Job Editor Server installed. The Job Editor Server should be activated on a PC in advance when AUTOMATIC: TRANSMIT TO SERVER is specified on this screen. Network Procedure Function

1. Touch CHANGE DATA SEND SYSTEM on the Image Data Store/

Delete Site Selection Screen to display the Change Data Sending System Screen.

2. Touch MANUAL: OPERATE ON PC or AUTOMATIC: TRANSMIT TO

SERVER to select it.

3. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN. The Image Data Store/Delete Site

Selection Screen will be restored. Confirm that the indication of the HDD-— PC key reflects the change when restored. 10-11

Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) (continued) 10-12 Q FOR DETAILS: To Suspend the Data Transmission To suspend the transmission while the Image Data Transmitting Screen is displayed, touch CANCEL on the screen. On the popup menu displayed as shown below, touch YES io cancel the job, or touch NO to continue. The data stored in HDD will not be erased by this operation.

Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) (continued) To Delete Image Data from HDD/PC The password specified when storing the data in HDD/PC is required. The image data is to be specified by the given job name.

Î1. Press [MODE] to light up the [SCAN/SERVER] LED. Fee The Scan/Server Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.

2. Touch IMAGE STORE/DELETE.

rver setting menu ollowing modes SERVER Network Function The Image Data Store/Delete Site Selection Screen will be displayed. 10-13

Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) (continued)

The Image Data Password Entry Screen will be displayed. C2 nr To delete the data stored in a PC, operation on the PC side may be required, depending on the type of setup application installed in the PC. Follow the instruction according to the setup application installed in a PC. Also refer to the instruction for using the CHANGE DATA SEND SYS- TEM key on the screen.

4. Enter your image data password from the touch screen keypad.

Server inage data store/delete mode Please enter passuord Image store passnord(£) see To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character, then enter the correct job name.

The Job Name Entry Screen will be displayed. 10-14

Storing/Deleting Image Data in HDD/PC (Image Store/Delete) (continued)

6. Delete the image data.

Enter nax. 8 characters to name job

ABCDI111 2003/08/02 ERDHSSSS 2008/08/10 Touch the A or Y key on the right side of the job name list to highlight the name of the data to be deleted, then touch JOB DELETE. The popup menu will appear to confirm that you delete the selected data. Enter max. 8 characters Lo name job

ABCDI111 2003/08/02 Image StoremDeiete FFRATSTT 2003/08/10 Touch YES to delete the selected data, or touch NO to cancel. The popup menu will disappear.

7. Touch OKto restore the Scan/Server Setting Menu Screen.

To delete the data stored with different password, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to retum to the Image Data Password Entry Screen.

8. Press [MODE] to light up the [COPY] LED.

The Basic Screen will be restored. Network Function 10-15

Storing Image Data While Copying (Image Store&Output) Use this function to store the scanned image data in HDD after copying is completed.

Installation of the optional HDD (HD-105) is required for this function. With the HDD installed, the HDD STORE key will be displayed on the Output Mode popup menu. This storing function does not conflict with any copying condition other than Program Job.

ROTATION = SROUP = The Image Data Password Entry Screen will be displayed. 10-16

Storing Image Data While Copying (Image Store&Output) (continued)

3. Enter the desired image data password in up to 8 characters from

the touch screen keypad. Server inage data store/delete mode Please enter passuord Image store passnord(£) see To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character, then enter the correct password.

4. fthe password is correct, touch OK.

The Job Name Entry Screen will be displayed.

5. Enter the desired job name in up to 8 characters from the touch sou

screen keypad. ABCDI111 2003/08/03 ABCD2222 2005/08/17 EFSH3335 2003/08/10 To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character, then enter the correct job name.

6. If the job name is correct, touch OK twice to return to the Basic

Network Screen. Function The HDD icon is displayed in the message area of the Basic Screen.

7. Select the desired copying conditions, then enter the desired

DOWN on the platen glass. HINT See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals. 10-17

Storing Image Data While Copying (Image Store&Output) (continued)

9. Press [START] to scan and then print.

When the Store mode is used, touch STORE on the Basic Screen to deselect the Store mode when the store function is completed, i.e., after all originals are scanned, then press [START] to print.

To suspend the scanning or printing job, press [STOP] on the control panel. The popup menu will be displayed to ask you how to complete the current job. Touch CONTINUE to continue the job, EXIT to cancel the job and delete the data, or EXIT after storing data to HDD to store the data in HDD without printing. Press START to restart SPECIAL CAR SHENU OZ su After scanning all the originals, the machine automatically starts to print and store the data in HDD. When storing job is almost completed, SCANNER—HDD icon appears in the message area. Press [AUTO RESET] to restore the initial settings.

If the Memory Switch No. 41 is turned on in the Key Operator setting, the Image Data Storing Screen will be displayed while the image data is stored in HDD. (See p. 13-39 to p. 13-46 for details.) In this case, touch CANCEL on the Image Data Storing Screen to sus- pend the storing job, then touch YES on the popup menu to delete the data, or touch NO to continue.

Recalling Image Data from HDD/PC (Image Recall) Use this function to recall the image data from the HDD/PC to the built-in DIMM for printing.

+ Installation of the optional HDD (HD-105) is required to recall data from HDD. + To recall data from PC, the machine should be connected to PC by cross-cable, and a specific software for using Server function should be installed in PC. To recall data stored in the HDD/PC, enter the password specified at the time data was stored, then designate it by the job name. Use IMAGE COMBINATION to recall several jobs at a time and output them as one job.

+ Different output modes specified for combined jobs (e.g. Staple-sort and Sort) cannot be reproduced in the output copies. + Different job types (e.g. copy job and print job) can be combined. + Combined jobs should have the same setting in the following condi- tions: APS, Photo mode, Binding direction of the duplex originals + The job with any of the following conditions specified cannot be com- bined: Mixed Original, Image Insert, Book Copy, Program Job, Repeat, Overlay Î1. Press [MODE] to light up the [SCAN/SERVER] LED. The Scan/Server Setting Menu Screen will be dis- played. 10-19 Image Store&Output Image Recall

Recalling Image Data from HDD/PC (Image Recall) (continued)

2. Touch IMAGE RECALL.

The Image Data Password Entry Screen will be displayed.

3. Enter your image data password from the touch screen keypad.

Server inage data store/delete mode Please enter passuord Image store passnord(£) see To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character, then enter the correct job name.

The Recall Job Selection Screen will be displayed.

5. Selectthe job to be recalled.

Select job to be recal led UEDA 2903/10/06 Gi 2003/06/25) 2903/10/08 2003/02/19] 2903/10/08 2003/02/19] 2903/10/08 a 2003/03/18) [aooa 2503/10/23 Touch the desired job name key to highlight it, then touch # to move it to the recall list on the right side. To use Image Combination, touch IMAGE COMBI- NATION before touching à. Touching JOB CHECK displays the Check Screen to allow you to view all the feature selections made for that job. 10-20

Recalling Image Data from HDD/PC (Image Recall) (continued

+ To cancel the job moved to the recall list, touch the job name in the list to highlight it, then touch 4 to return it to the left side key. + _ Two or more jobs can be combined and output as one job, provided that those jobs have been stored with the same copying conditions. Use Image Combination, if desired. If the desired job name is displayed in the recall list, touch WAIT OUTPUT, PROOF OUTPUT, or AUTO OUTPUIT, as desired. Follow the procedure below according to the selected output mode key to complete the image recall and output operation. Selecting WAIT OUTPUT. (1) Touch OK. When the data transmission is completed, the Basic Screen will be displayed reflecting the settings made for that job. (2) Enter the desired print quantity, then press [START] to print. Selecting PROOF OUTPUT. (1) Touch OK. The data transmis- sion starts with the Basic Screen restored. When the data transmission is completed, a sample copy is output, then the Check Screen will be displayed. (2) Check the sample copy, then change the copy conditions if required. Enter the desired print quantity, then press [START] to print. Selecting AUTO OUTPUT: (1) Touch OK. The popup menu to | enter the print quantity will be == displayed. (2) Enter the desired print quantity, then touch OK. When the data transmission is completed, the machine automatically starts to print. 10-21

Recalling Image Data from HDD/PC (Image Recall) (continued

Key Operator can set the machine to retum to the Recall Job Selection Screen when printing job is completed, so that the data recalling can be continued. See p. 18-39 to p. 13-46. In this case, the Image Data Recalling Screen will be displayed while the data is recalled. On this screen, touch CANCEL to suspend recalling. Onthe popup menu displayed, touch YES to delete the data recalled to DIMM, or touch NO to continue. The data stored in HDD/PC will not be erased by this operation. 10-22

Editing Image Data Using PC (Image Edit) Use this function to transmit a scanned image data to PC to edit it, and return the edited data to DIMM for printing. The edited image data cannot be stored and will be deleted when printing job is completed.

To use this mode, the machine should be connected to PC by cross- cable, or with network provided that a specific software for using Server function is installed in PC. >>>Specifications for Editing Image Datac<< [incompatible Conditions: 1-2, 2-2, AMS, Selecting output mode, Selecting paper size (APS is automatically selected), Setting print quantity, Rotation, FULL AREA in Non STD Size, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Stamp/ Overlay Î1. Press [MODE] to light up the [SCAN/SERVER] LED. The Scan/Server Setting Menu Screen will be displayed. 10-23 Image Recall Image Edit

Editing Image Data Using PC (Image Edit) (continued)

2. Touch IMAGE EDIT.

STORÉIDELETE RÉCALL EDIT

The Scanner Setting Screen will be displayed.

3. Select the desired Scanning conditions.

Press START to scan originals Position original in the RADF OUTB UT AATDSTMODEICOEN DES TL ENS LOS. PAPER SE FINCLION Print quantity cannot be entered.

4. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE

DOWN on the platen glass. C2 nr See p. 3-2 to p. 3-5 for details on positioning originals.

5. Touch STORE on the Scanner Condition Selection Screen to

highlight it. Press START to scan originals Position original in the RADF

Editing Image Data Using PC (Image Edit) (continued)

6. Press [START] to scan.

After scanning is completed, the Image Data Edit Screen will be displayed to indicate that the scanned image data is ready for transmission.

To stop the Image Edit operation while the Image Data Edit Screen is displayed, touch EXIT. lf the popup menu shown below is displayed, touch YES to cancel the editing job and delete the image data, or touch NO to continue. Image Edit Z. Perform the data transmission procedure on PC, then edit the image data as required. CZ nr For details, refer to the instruction manual for Image Edit mode. When completed, make a setting on PC to return the edited data to DIMM. The Basic Screen will be restored. Network Function

The copier stars the printing job. When printing is completed, edited data will be deleted automatically. 10-25

To Use Web Utilities When the machine is connected with a PC over a network, the web browser activated on the PC provides the following functions.

Main Page Displays the job in progress, service call, and machine information. Job Status Displays the current and previous job status. HDD Job Information Searches the built-in HDD for an image data by job name, then checks, outputs, or deletes the image data. You can also change the job name of the image data. To use this function, the optional HDD is required in the machine. Environment Setup Performs the Key Operator setting concerning network environment. Browser: Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 / Netscape 4.7 or later Follow the procedure below to access the Web Utilities of the machine using the web browser.

Turn on the power to the PC connected with the machine over a network. Q DETAILS Contact your network manager for details on the network system. Activate the web browser, then select [Open] from the File menu. CS 21x Type the Intemet adress of a document ar folder, and Internet Explorer wil open it ar vou.

T° Gpen as Web Folder

Enter the URL (http:// [IP address or host name of the machine]), then click on [OK]. Q DETAILS Ask your network manager for the IP address or host name of the machine. 10-26

To Use Web Utilities (continued) The Main Page of the Web Utilities will be displayed. Fe Ge Ven Fos tou Ho rat + + - D D À] Qt roms Ouse DE SD: D des [mo 22201/ctarn/rdex ent Main Page & EBSERVER] Functions The Main Page informs you of the current job status of the machine and the maintenance item, if required. + Service call mage Recal + JAM + Paper supply mage Edit + Toner supply To Use Web + Staple cartridge supply Lits + Dispose ot Punch waste basket Machine + PM call Information Job Status Q DETAILS iomaion + Click on [REFRESHI] in the Web Uiilities window to update the information. + The Web Utilities window is subject to change without notice. + _ This section uses the 7272 as an example. 10-27

To Display Information on Machine Follow the procedure below to display the machine information using the web browser.

1. Open the Web Utilities window.

C2 avr See p. 10-26 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities.

2. Clickon [Machine Status].

The window now provides the paper tray configuration, engine configuration, and option information. Q DETAILS The same information will be provided also in the Job Status window. See p. 10-29. Fraper ray [Sue [ve | Sam Menara (A3 Norma for [At Momare É — Machine Type re Couney Code [Exp Dis Language |Exg ERDH Capaciyeu |64 ERDH valable) [10 Tab Count (77 Féer Com [15 Tab Count (775 Finish [Fo Mo ADE (Mas DE Type (DF2 HDD_ or Mous LT [ia Moss Devaiper Count (775 Drun Count (72 Q DETAILS Click on [REFRESH] in the window to update the information. 10-28

To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status) Follow the procedure below to display the current job status, job list including reserved jobs and job information, and information on up to 16 previous jobs.

1. Open the Web Utilities window.

CL nr See p. 10-26 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities.

2. Click on [Job Status].

| abs os Romain Finite) The current job status, number of jobs in waiting, and remaining time to elapse before completing the print job. Q DETAILS + Clicking on [7272] will display the machine information. See p. 10-28. -+_ Click on [REFRESH] to update the information.

3. Display the current job or reserved job information.

Click on the desired [Job Priority No.] under the “Job List”. The information on the specified job will appear in the second “Job List” area. Q DETAILS If no print job or reserved job exists, “Job Empty” will be displayed in the first “Job List” area. 10-29 Machine Information Job Status

To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status) (continued)

4. Display the previous job information.

Click on the desired [Job ID No.] under the “Job Status”. The information on the specified previous job will appear in the second “Job Status” area.

Q DETAILS If no print job has been made after the machine powered on, no indication will appear in the first “Job Status” area. 10-30

Operating Image Data Stored in HDD (HDD Job Information Use the web browser to search the built-in HDD for an image data, then check, output, or delete the image data. Changing the job name given to the image data is also available. This function is available only when the optional HDD is installed in the machine.

1. Open the Web Utilities window.

C2 Hivr See p. 10-26 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities.

2. Clickon [HDD Job Information].

C2 avr The Image Recall Password is the image data password entered in up to 8 characters when the image data was stored in HDD. See p. 10-5, 10-10, 10-14 or 10-17 for details. Fous + : D2 2 Due aroume Kg [5 Jéelu Web Utilities HDD Job Informat ion À me Hooly | Resat The Job Search text box and the Job List will be displayed in the window. The list is made of the jobs stored with the same image data password and arranged in alphabetical order. DER CTI) Job List Q DETAILS + _ The Job List indicates the job name, saved date, and the page count. The “P Job” in the page count column indicates that the data was stored using Program Job function. + All the image data stored in HDD will be checked and those having the same image data password will be listed. + The printer data stored in HDD will also be listed. 10-31 Job Status HDD Job Information

Operating Image Data Stored in HDD (HDD Job Information) (continued)

4. Search the desired image data.

To search a specific image data, enter the job name of the desired image data in the Job Search text box, then click on [Search]. The result will be displayed as a list. DETAILS + The search will be performed over the jobs having the same image data password collected in step 3. You cannot make a search of all the jobs for the given job name. + The printer data stored in HDD will also be listed.

5. Checkthe image data information.

Click on [mage] on the right side of the desired job name to view the contents. The reduced image of the first page of the selected data and detailed information will be displayed. Click on [Outpufl to print the image data. Proceed to step 6. Choosing [Back] will resume the searched job list.

6. Output the image data.

Click on [Outpui] on the right side of the desired job name to print out the image data. The Output Setting dialogue box will be displayed. EEE! If the machine is under the control of EKC function, enter the 8-digit EKC password. Choose [Auto Output], [Proof Output], or [Wait Outpuf], as desired. Click on [Back] to cancel the output setting. 10-32

Operating Image Data Stored in HDD (HDD Job Information) (continued) Q DETAILS If incorrect EKC password is entered, the print job cannot be completed successfully and the message displayed in the “Result of job print” dialogue box will inform you that the wrong password was entered. C2 avr See p. 13-15 for details of the EKC setting. Selecting Auto output: Enter the desired print quantity, then click on [Apply]. The machine starts to output the specified number of copied sets, then the “Result of job print” dialogue box will appear when completed. Q DETAILS The web browser does not allow you to cancel the printing job, if it is cur- renily in progress. Use the machine to stop printing. Selecting Proof output: Enter the desired print quantity, then click on [Apply]. A sample copy will be output and the Check Screen will be displayed on the touch screen of the machine. JCHECK MODEL AASIC 2 SPECIAL CRIE, }_Setting change is avalable sxespe screoneditems- 1 Min roy 1-1 (REF) ER Photo Mode LEE Staple + Sort Cover shestiFrent/Eoëk) DRE RE D Can — Information Check the sample copy, change the copy conditions if required, then press [START] on the control panel of the machine to output the rest except the sample set. The “Result of job print” dialogue box will appear when print job is completed. Selecting Wait output: Network, Enter the desired print quantity, then click on [Apply]. Function The image data will be recalled but held to be output, then the Basic Screen will be displayed on the touch screen of the machine. Select the desired copy conditions and enter the desired print quantity, then press [START] on the machine control panel. Choosing [Back] will resume the Job list dialogue box. Q DETAILS When selecting Auto output or Proof output, only the web browser setting allows the print quantity to be specified. 10-33

Operating Image Data Stored in HDD (HDD Job Information) (continued) 10-34 When selecting Wait output, the print quantity entered in the web browser can be changed on the machine control panel before pressing [START]. Delete the image data. Click on [Delete] on the right side of the desired job name to delete the image data. The Job Delete dialogue box will be displayed. Click on [ Yes] to delete the data. Choosing [Back] will resume the Job list dialogue box. Q DETAILS + _ The printer data stored in HDD will also be deleted. + Once deleted, the job cannot be restored. Change the job name of the image data. Click on [Renamel on the right side of the desired job name to change the job name of the image data. The Change Job name dialogue box will be displayed. Enter the new job name using alphabets and numbers, then click on [Apply]. Choosing [Back] will resume the Job list dialogue box. Q DETAILS Clicking on [Apply] will be ignored if the entered job name is already used. The job name cannot also be changed ïf any symbols other than alphabets and numbers are entered.

Setting E-Mail Transmission Function (Environment Setup) Perform the Key Operator setting concerning the network environment using the web browser. For details of the E-Mail Transmission Setting, refer to p. 13-8.

1. Open the Web Utilities window.

CZ nr See p. 10-26 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities.

2. Clickon [Environment Setup].

Environment Setup rs [Er Network Function The E-Mail Transmission Setting window will be displayed. Q DETAILS The Extension for maintenance option will be exclusively used by a ser- vice representative. 10-35

Setting E-Mail Transmission Function {Environment Setup) (continued)

4. Perform the setting.

Enter the IP address of the mail server, IP address of the DNS server (if needed), time difference, and E-mail address to be informed of the machine status. Click on the check box of the desired transmission item. JE dt vew Favotes Toos Hp [| Less - +. © A A1 Qt Gras ser | Er & aies [Er ht>/710112129/eterm esp john és [lu E-Mail transmission setting (E-Mail Transmission) Sendin Settins hoply | Reset Sandins test Back Main Paso Click on [Apply] to complete the setting and return to the Web Utilities window. Clicking on [Resef| will void the setting and restore the Web Utilities window. Clicking on [Sending tesf| will send a test mail to the manager. 10-36

Setting E.K.C. Function (Environment Setup) Make the following Key Operator settings concerning the E.K.C. function using the web browser on a PC. E.K.C. Data Add (see step 4.) Add a new E.K.C. data (password, name, and copy limit) to the E.K.C. list. E.K.C. Data List (see step 5.) Change or delete the E.K.C. data (password, name, or copy limit) in the list, or reset the counters. E.K.C. Function Setting (see step 6.) Specity the following E.K.C. function settings. Switching the E.K.C.: ON/OFF Effect when the copy limit is reached: Immediately / After job / Warning E.K.C. password: 8 digits / under 8 digits E.K.C. password input timing: Auto reset timer/ Complete job Wrong E.K.C. password (from printer): Accept / Reject Q DETAILS The above settings can also be made on the machine itself, except for the Wrong E.K.C. password (from printer) setting. Some settings may require operations on the machine. Refer io pages 13-15 and 13-39 to 13-46. Open the Web Utilities window. C2 avr See p. 10-26 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities. Click on [Environment Setup]. Display the E.K.C. Function Setting window. Enter the 4-digit Key Operator password, then click on [Applyi. [Enronment Setup ; Network Function Web Utilities 10-37

Setting E.K.C. Function {Environment Setup) (continued) Click on [E.K.C. function setting]. Web Utilities

The Enter Network Password dialog box will be displayed. Enter “ekc” in the User Name text box, and an 8-digit master key code in the Password text box, then click on [OK]. The E.K.C. Function Setting menu window will be displayed.

Setting E.K.C. Function {Environment Setup) (continued) Enter the following items to register a new E.K.C. data, then click on [Apply]. Number: Automatically assigned Password: 8 digits max. Name: 8 characters max. Limit: 999,999 copies max. se Q DETAILS sonbie To clear the text boxes, click on [Reseñ. Image To cancel adding a new E.K.C. data, click on [Back] or any E.K.C. e Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window. Q DETAILS: Error Message age Ed + A duplicate password or name will be rejected with an error message. However, duplicating a password is possible using the Key Operator Utilities setting. See p. 13-18. + The Name entry box accepits letters (capital letters only), numbers, Hé and four symbols: (, ), -, and /. Any other symbols will be rejected with an error message displayed in the window. Job Status + Max. 1,000 EK.C. entries can be registered. An error message will be displayed if the above limit is exceeded. + An error message may be displayed when the data entry has not _ been completed due to the machine operation in progress. Please Environment click on [Apply] while the machine is in an idle state. — The registered content will be displayed in the window. The new E.K.C. data will be transmitted to the machine immediately so that is Network valid for the user operations. Function roons Sms 9 Er d 5: Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Function Setting menu window or any menu item to jump to the desired window. 10-39

Setting E.K.C. Function {Environment Setup) (continued)

Edit the E.K.C. data. Click on [E.K.C. data lisfl in the E.K.C. Function Setting menu window or from the menu in any subsequent window. Eee fe De + x [en -+. D 2 À) Que Dre an [Ed been ren am Jéelw E.K.C. function setting The E.K.C. Data List window will be displayed. PA des ET avr The “Another user count” in the list indicates the count accumulated for the jobs performed by non-registered users. This data cannot be edited other than resetting the counter. To change Password, Name, or Limit: (1) Click on the number of the data to be edited. The E.K.C. Edit Setting window will be displayed. (a 7 et] Res] BK C inc meme 10-40

Setting E.K.C. Function {Environment Setup) (continued) (2) Change the password, name, or limit, as desired. For details in entering procedure, refer to p. 10-39. (3) Click on [Apply. Q DETAILS To clear the text boxes, click on [Resef. To cancel editing the E.K.C. data, click on [Back] or any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window. Q DETAILS: Error Message See “Details” on p. 10-39 if an error message is displayed after clicking on [Applyi. The edited content will be displayed in the window. The edited data will be transmitted to the machine immediately so that is valid for the user operations. Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Data List window. h To reset E.K.C. count: SoreBete Job Status Informatior Environment Setup (1) Click on the check box(es) to select the E.K.C. data of the counter to be cleared. If all the counters are to be cleared, click on [SelectAlf. (2) Click on the radio button (a white circle) heading the “Reset the count of Network selected item(s).….Copy/Print’ or “Reset the count of selected item(s).…. Funeion Scan.” 10-41

Setting E.K.C. Function {Environment Setup) (continued) (3) Click on [Apply. The Count Reset Confirmation window will be displayed. es) Q DETAILS To cancel resetting the E.K.C. data, click on [Back] or any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window. (4) Click on [Apply] to immediately reset the counters to zero. The message “Setting was changed” will be displayed. Q DETAILS: Error Message If an error message is displayed after clicking on [Apply], a counter has not been reset due to a machine operation in progress. The machine must be in an idle state when you click on [Apply]. Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Data List window. To delete E.K.C. data: 10-42

Setting E.K.C. Function {Environment Setup) (continued) (1) Click on the check box(es) to select the E.K.C. data to be deleted. If all the data are to be cleared, click on [SelectAl. (2) Click on the radio button (a white circle) heading the “Delete selected item(s) (Except for Another user count).” (3) Click on [Apply. The Delete Confirmation window will be displayed. Q DETAILS To cancel deleting the E.K.C. data, click on [Back] or any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window. (4) Click on [Apply to immediately delete the data. The message “Setting was deleted” will be displayed. D À Gus Gr Dee DS 85 -2 dés Q DETAILS: Error Message If an error message is displayed after clicking on [Applÿy], data has not been deleted due to a machine operation in progress. The machine must be in an idle state when you click on [Apply]. Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Data List window or any menu item to jump to the desired window. 10-43 Environment Setup Network Function

Setting E.K.C. Function {Environment Setup) (continued) To save E.K.C. data list as a file: (1) Click on [Save this table as a file]. (2) Click on the radio button heading “Save this file to disk,” then click on [OK]. ae a on) (3) In the dialog box, designate the folder for saving the data, then click on [Save]. 10-44

Settin K.C. Function (Environment Setup) (continued Q DETAILS + The E.K.C. data will be stored in CSV format. + The data cannot be saved while the machine is in operation. In this case, try this procedure again after the machine starts idling. Click on [Back] in the browser window to return to the E.K.C. Data List window for starting over. + Example: E.K.C. data list stored as a file The “Another user count” will be stored by the name of “UNKNOWN” in the last line. NUMBER,PASSWORD,NAME,DUPLEXCOUNT,COUNT.LIMIT,S CANLARGECOUNT,SCANCOUNT 0001,00000001,KITA,000000,000000,000010,000000,000000 0002,00000002,TANAKA,000000,000000,000020,000000,000000 0003,00000003, YUZU,000000,000000,000030,000000,000000 . 0004,00000004,1$ AMI,000000,000000,000040,000000,000000 000$,0000000$,SUZUE,000000,000000,000060,000000,000000 0006,00000006,REAL,000000,000000,000070,000000,000000 Image 0007,00000007,1SH11,000000,000000,000080,000000,000000 1001,00000000, UNKNOWN,000000,000000,000000,000000,000000 mage Recall Set the E.K.C. function. Click on [E.K.C. function setting] in the E.K.C. Function Setting menu QE window or from the menu in any subsequent window. Mac The E.K.C. Function Setting window will be displayed. Click on the radio button (white circle) of the desired selection item(s) so that ss. a black dot appears in it. _. error Informati tek » +: O3 À Dent Caron Em D dr 5 Ed tr en 2 Dupont oem dé Environment Setup Network Function Click on [Applÿ. The change made in the settings will be transmitted immediately for the user operations. 10-45

Setting E.K.C. Function {Environment Setup) (continued) Q DETAILS To restore the previous setting, click on [Reset]. To cancel the E.K.C. function setting, click on [Back. Q DETAILS: Error Message If an error message is displayed after clicking on [Applÿy], a setting has not been completed due to a machine operation in progress. The machine must be in an idle state when you click on [Apply]. és) Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Function Setting menu window or any menu item to jump to the desired window. 10-46

Setting Scan Transmission Function (Environment Setup) Follow the procedure below to register, change, or delete the address for the transmission of the scanned image data using the web browser. Q DETAILS Using Scan Transmission Setting in the Key Operator mode, you cannot newly register an E-mail/HDD/FTP address or group the entries. >>>Specifications for Scan Transmission Setting<<< The Scan Transmission Setting is available only when the optional Printer Controller is installed in the machine.

1. Open the Web Utilities window.

HINT See p. 10-26 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities.

2. Clickon [Environment Setup].

Setting Scan Transmission Function {Environment Setup) (continued) The [Scan transmission setting] key appears in the window only when the optional Printer Controller is installed in the machine.

4. Register the E-Mail, HDD, and FTP, as required.

bout » 2: D 3 À Dent Cirmmm dm Dr 2» tr 0 upon en Fr] Scan transmission setting. Tama Registration (Japanese mot available) Fra Add M Commun 200 Character) DOXEN PEN © sonores as dub ue when check)

DD Regsraion (Japanese is mt avale) pare _] LL Gta 18 rc) Patate _] CE Pogien_ | _Eny ust IPTP Regstration (Japanese ls no available) Postes | Enr ut seu] Q DETAILS + Click on the DAILY USE check box in the E-mail Registration table, if the data is frequently used. + _ The symbols that cannot be displayed in the entry box will be ignored, if entered. + The HDD Box No. will be registered as a 4-digit number. For example, entering [1] will be registered as [0001]. Click on [Registration] to complete the entry. The registered content will be displayed. tu » +: D 2 À Den Gomme Sr dE - PSE Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window. 10-48

Setting Scan Transmission Function {Environment Setup) (continued)

LTÉE] Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window. Change the registered contents. Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 5. Click on the entry name to be changed. The window for changing the selected item will be displayed. vas » + - D 2 À Ont Gros Be D|E D DS CE Dés E-Mail Ed Data (Japanese & not avale) Eee D

Change the contents as desired, then click on [Registration]. The registered content will be displayed. Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window. mage Recall mage Edit

Setting Scan Transmission Function {Environment Setup) (continued)

7. Deletethe registered contents.

Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 5. Click on the check box in the “Delete” column of the item to be deleted, then click on [Delete]. The window for deleting the selected item will be displayed. sms 023 Que ares ma 9 0-0 PS me Zee mal Déete Q DETAILS Click on the check box again to release the selection. Confirm the registered name to be deleted, then click on [Yes]. Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window.

8. Touse grouping function, display the Group Setting window.

Click on [Group Setting] on the Scan Transmission Setting window. Scan transmission setting. Email Registration (Japanese mot available) pre | Lots 15 ce) RE 200 Gas) ad de he de)

Setting Scan Transmission Function {Environment Setup) (continued)

Setting Scan Transmission Function {Environment Setup) (continued) To display the Group Entry List: Click on [Group Entry List]. The registered group names and members will be displayed in a list. Click on [Resef to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window. To change the registered content in a group: Click on [Group Entry Lis to display the list, then click on a group name to be changed. The Group Setting window of the selected group will be displayed. Change the contents as desired, then click on [Registration]. The registered content will be displayed. Click on [Back to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window. To delete a group: Click on [Group Entry List] to display the list, then click on a check box heading the group name to be deleted. Click on [Delete]. The Group Delete confirmation window will be displayed. CPE TT bout » 2: D 3 À Ban Lurrm Sms Br DE » te fn nat em rm és Group Date Check the group name to be deleted, then click on [Yes]. To cancel the procedure, click on [No]. In either case, the Group Entry List window will be restored. 10-52

Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (Environ- ment Setup) Follow the procedure below to transmit the following setting file from the machine to a PC (export) using the web browser, edit the setting data on the PC, then return the file to the machine (import).

• E.K.C. data (max. 1,000 files) + Three Scan Transmission Setting data E-mail data (max. 1,008 files) HDD (Box No.) (max. 48 files) FTP (FTP server address) (max. 48 files) Q DETAILS + The machine setting file can be stored in a PC so that it may be returned to the machine at any time, and is available for common use if you have two or more machines. The file transmitted to a PC, being converted to a file type for batch processing, can be edited efficienily and returned to the machine. + The file transmitted to a PC normally contains the four data types mentioned above, however, each data type can be made into a file and transmitted separately. For details of E.K.C. data, see p. 13-17. For details of Scan Transmission Setting data, see p. 13-53. + The exported setting file of this machine can be imported to another model, and vice versa. For details, contact your service representa- tive.

1. Open the Web Utilities window.

CL nr See p. 10-26 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities.

2. Clickon [Environment Setup].

Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (Environment Setup) (contin- ued Click on [Setting data Import/Export]. Web Utilities Environment Setup Enter “ekc” in the User Name text box, and an 8-digit master key code in the Password text box, then click on [OK]. The Setting File Import/Export window will be displayed.

4. Export the machine setting file.

Select the desired file type from the pull-down menu, then click on [Export]. Q DETAILS The data format cannot be changed from “TAB separated.” 10-54

Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (Environment Setup) (contin- ued et» +: © 3 À Dent Ciremm Bmn Dl 5 + CE Je Mrs [Beer Seting data Import Export

Confirm that the radio button heading “Save this file to disk” is marked in the File Download dialog box, then click on [OK]. Aée) Machine Information Job Status In the dialog box, designate the folder for saving the machine setting file, then DD Job click on [Save]. Information Environment (( ) Setup DETAILS The file name is automatically assigned as described below. Select the data to be exported, changing the name if desired. + ekc_tab.ixt (E.K.C. data) ok + _ip_email.ixt (E-mail data of Scan Transmission Setting data) *_ip_hddixt (HDD data of Scan Transmission Setting data) *_ip_ftp.ixt (FTP data of Scan Transmission Setting data) Q DETAILS: Error Message The file cannot be accessed when the machine is operating. lf an error message is displayed, try again to save the file after the current machine operation is completed. A dialog box will be displayed when the saving operation is completed. Click on [Close]. 10-55

Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (Environment Setup) (contin- ued

5. Edit the machine setting file.

The machine setting file transmitted to a PC is a TAB separated text file which can be edited using an application software such as Text Editor or Table Editor. À new setting file can also be created according to the specifications for each file type. See p. 10-57 to p. 10-58 for details.

6. Import the machine setting file.

Click on [Browse] to designate the machine setting file to be imported, then click on [Impori]. eut » + : QD Al Gas Gree Sn GIE 3: D Déc lu 3 EKC settings were registered Entry List | Q DETAILS: Error Message Ifthe registration cannot be completed successfully, error messages will be displayed as follows. + Can't transfer data (The machine is busy) Try again to import the data after the machine operation in progress is completed. + _ The data cannot be recognized Confirm that the data is the machine setting file. + Data size is too large Confirm that the data is the machine setting file. Check if the file size exceeds 100,000 bytes. + The data cannot be registered Check if inappropriate description is made in the machine setting file. See p. 10-57 to p. 10-58 for details. Check if the file entries are already over the limit. 10-56

Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (Environment Setup) (contin- ued (e} DETAILS: To Edit the Machine Setting File + Save the file as a text. + Begin the file with a specified tag. (ex. #£KC_TAB) + A line should be 300 bytes or less. + The file size should be 100,000 bytes or less. + The line that begins with “#” is a comment. ex. Machine setting file of an E.K.C. data HREKC_TAB HPAS LIMIT

00000023 100000 E 12121212 300000 | & DETAILS: Specifications for Each Machine Setting File Type Ê . data setting file: : . EÉ2-e the file with #EKC_TAB. en + Max. 1,000 files can be edited. En + A line should include PASSWORD, NAME, and LIMIT, separated by Setup a tab. + Use up to 8 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify PASSWORD. + Use numbers, alphabets (capital letters only), and four symbols: (, ), - , and / only to specify NAME. Network. + Use up to 6 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify LIMIT (0 - 999,999). Function E mail data setting file: + Begin the file with #IP_EMAIL. + Max. 1,008 files can be edited. + The second line starts with #GROUP NAME, if using grouping func- tion, followed by max. 12 group names from 5th to 16th column. + GROUP NAME should be 18 bytes or less. + The third line (if using grouping function) should include NAME, ADDRESS, KANA, and DAILY USE, being separated by a tab. + _ NAME should be 18 bytes or less. + KANA (same as NAME) should be 18 bytes or less. + _ ADDRESS should be 200 bytes or less. 10-57

Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File (Environment Setup) (contin- 10-58 ued + Mark DAILY USE and a group name with “1” in each column, if nec- essary. + A group can include max. 2,046 bytes of e-mail address of the mem- bers. + A group should include at least one user. ex. Machine setting file of E-mail data test sample MyGroup month

abcdefg Akita alpha 1 Aomori April 1 1 Augest 1 1 baby alpha Aomori gamma HDD data setting file: + Begin the file name with #IP_HDD. + Max. 48 files can be edited. + A line should include ENTRY NAME and BOX NUMBER, being separated by a tab. + _ENTRY NAME should be 18 bytes or less. + Use up to 4 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify a BOX NUMBER. FTP data setting file: + Begin the file name with #IP_FTP. + Max. 48 files can be edited. + A line should include PROFILE NAME, HOST ADDRESS, FILE PATH, LOGIN, and PASSWORD, being separated by a tab. + PROFILE NAME should be 18 bytes or less. + HOST ADDRESS should be 63 bytes or less. *+_ FILE PATH should be 96 bytes or less. + LOGIN should be 47 bytes or less. + PASSWORD should be 31 bytes or less.

SECTION Paper and Original Information Paper Information 11-2 Original Information 11-8 Paper & Original Info

Paper Information This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading copy paper. + Tray 1,2, 8 and 4 (Main body tray) + LCT (LT-402/LT-412 Large Capacity Tray) + Multi-sheet bypass tray Also, following equipments are provided for conveying/delivering copies. ADU (Automatic Duplex Unit) Finisher (FS-110/FS-111/FS-210) Cover sheet feeder (P1-110) Punching / Z-Folding unit (PZ-108/109) + Punching kit (PK-110/120/120 Type-A) Shift tray (SF-101) Exit tray (for the machine without Finisher) Refer to the following information on paper capacity for each. Paper Weight Paper Trays Weight Tray 1 and 2 (service-fixed) 2 Tray 3 and 4 (user-adjustable) | 60 - 90 g/m 11-22 (Main body tray) LCT (LT-402/LT-412) Multi-sheet bypass tray

91 - 200 g/m? for Thick paper

50 - 59 g/m? for Thin paper

91 - 170 g/m? for Tab paper

Equipments Weight ADU 60 - 200 g/m? Finisher 50 - 200 g/m?

60 - 90 g/m? in Stitch&Fold /

60 - 80 g/m° in Three-Fold mode

+ Some 170 g/m? paper types may not be punched easily. + The tray specified for Thin or Tab paper cannot be used for duplex copying.

Paper Information (continued) C2 HINTS + See p. 13-23 for Paper Type setting of Tray 1, 2, 3, 4 or LCT. + See p. 3-29 for Paper Type setting of Multi-sheet bypass tray. Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity Paper Trays Capacity Tray 1 (Main body tray) 1,500 sheets (80 g/m?) Tray 2 (Main body tray) 1,000 sheets (80 g/m?) Tray 3 and 4 (Main body tray) 500 sheets (80 g/m?) LCT (LT-402/LT-412) 4,000 sheets (80 g/m?) Multi-sheet bypass tray 100 sheets (80 g/m?) 1 sheet each for thick/hin paper and transparent film Equipments Capacity ADU Unlimited Finisher Secondary (sub) tray | 200 sheets (FS-110/FS- Primary (main) 111/FS-210) tray 500 sheets (A5, A5R) 3,000 sheets (FS-110: A4, A4R, B5R, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R) 2,500 sheets (FS-210: A4, A4R, B5R, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R) 1,500 sheets (A3, F4, B4) 1,000 sheets* (Staple-sort mode) “See the following table. Finisher (FS-210) Booklet tray 100 sheets (A3, B4, 11"x17", 8.5"x14" in Fold/ Stitch&Fold mode) Fold: 33 sets for 3-sheet-folded booklet (99 sheets, 396 pages) Stitch&Fold: 20 sets for 5-sheet-folded book- let (100 sheets, 400 pages) 75 sheets (A4R, 8.5'x11"R in Fold/ Stitch&Fold mode) Fold: 25 sets for 3-sheet-folded booklet (75 sheets, 300 pages) Stitch&Fold: 15 sets for 5-sheet-folded book- let (75 sheets, 300 pages) 50 sheets (1 folded sheet in Three-Fold mode) Cover sheet feeder (2 trays) 200 sheets (200 g/m?) for each Punching kit Unlimited Punching / Z-Folding unit Punch: Unlimited Z-Fold: 1 sheet only See the table on the next page for using Staple-sort with Z-Fold mode. 11-3 Paper Information

Paper Information (continued) Equipments Capacity Shift tray 500 sheets M F4, B4, A5, 11x17”, 8.5"x14” 1,250 sheets (A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5"x11”, 8.5”x11"R) 100 sheets (A5R, A6R, 5.5”x8.5”, 5.5"x8.5"R) Exit tray 150 sheets Paper Capacity for Staple-sort mode of FS-110/111/210 Finisher Paper size De “or No. of ones A8, 11x17" LAS, 5.5°x8.5 as Sont Soit 2-9 50 sets 50 sets 100 sets 10-20 50 50 50 21-30 30 30 30 31-40 25 25 25 41-50 20 20 20 51-60* = 15 15 61-100* - 10 10 *: FS-111 Finisher only Capacity for Mixed Size Originals using Z-Fold and Staple-Sort Capacity for one stapled set Primary Tray Capacity Number of Z-folded sheets | Number of regular sheets 1 sheet 1 - 40 sheets 20 stapled sets 2 0 - 30 10 3 0-20 4 4 0-10 3 6 or more Staple-Sort is unavailable with Z-Fold.

Paper Information (continued) Paper Size Paper Trays Available Sizes Tray 1 and 2 (Main body tray) A4 fixed (can be changed to B5, A5, 8.5”x11” or 5.5”x8.5”) Tray 3 and 4 (Main body tray) STD size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11x17", 8.5'x14", 8.5"x11" “Portrait orientation only. STD (special): Detects 8.5"x11"R instead of A4R, 5.5"x8.5" instead of A5. Non STD size: Max. 314 mm x 459 mm - Min. 210 mm x 140 mm Wide size: A3W, B4W, F4W, A4W, A4WR, B5W, A5W, 11"x17"W, 8.5"x11"W, 5.5"x8.5"W LCT (LT-402) A4 fixed (can be changed to the following sizes) STD size: B5, 8.5"x11" Non STD size: Max. 314 mm x 223 mm - Min. 257 mm x 182 mm Wide size: A4W, B5W, 8.5"x11"W LCT (LT-412) A3 fixed (can be changed to the following sizes) STD size: B4, F4, A4, A4R, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R Non STD size: Max. 314 mm x 459 mm - Min. 257 mm x 210 mm Wide size: A3W, B4W, F4W, A4W, A4WR, B5W, A5W, 11"x17"W, 8.5"x11"W, 5.5"x8.5"W C2 mwrs + Main body trays 1 and 2 are initially fixed to A4. Contact your service representative to change the tray size, if desired. + Main body trays 3 and 4 are user-adjustable. See p. 2-34 to change the paper size of the tray. For special size setting, see p. 13-23 to p. 13-24. 11-5 Paper Information graine

Paper Information (continued) + LT-402 is initially fixed to A4, and LT-412 is fixed to A3. Contact your service representative to change the tray size, if desired. Paper Trays Available Sizes Multi-sheet bypass tray STD size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, A6R, 11x17", 8.5"x11" STD (special): Detects 8.5"x11"R or F4 instead of A4R or 5.5"x8.5" instead of AG6R. Non STD size: Max. 814 mm x 459 mm - Min. 100 mm x 148 mm Wide size: A3W, B4W, F4W, A4W, A4WR, B5W, B5WR, A5W, A5SWR, 11"x17"W, 8.5"x11"W, 8.5"x11"WR, 5.5"x8.5"W, 5.5"x8.5"WR Equipments Available Sizes ADU STD size / STD (special): A3 to A5* “Portrait orientation only. Non STD size: Unavailable Wide size: A3W to A5W* “Portrait orientation only. Finisher Max. 314 mm x 459 mm - Min. 100 mm x 148 mm A4R / 8.5"x11"R only in Three-Fold mode Cover sheet feeder (upper tray) A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" Cover sheet feeder (lower tray) Max. 314 mm x 459 mm to A5 Punching kit Max. 314 mm x 459 mm to A5 Punching / Z-Folding unit Punch mode: A3, B4, F4, A4, B5 Z-Fold mode: A3, B4 All other paper sizes will be output without Z-fold. Shift tray Offset/Straight output: AS, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 12”x18”, 11x17", 8.5x14”, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R Straigt output only: A6R

Paper Information (continued) Exit tray Max. 314 mm x 459 mm - Min. 100 mm x 148 mm CZ Hinr See p. 8-29 to p. 3-82 for specifying the special paper size of the Multi- sheet bypass tray. Special Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray Multi-sheet bypass tray accepts the following special paper type that cannot be loaded in the main body trays. Transparent film, labels, hole punch, rag content

When using special paper type other than the above mentioned, select “User” as the paper type in Paper type/size setting for the Multi-sheet bypass tray. To Store Copy Paper + Store paper in a cool, dry area. Using damp copy paper may cause a paper misfeed. Keep partially used packages tightly wrapped during storage. + Do not place paper packages vertically to store. Paper curl due to the vertical storage may cause a paper misfeed. Paper Information graine 11-7

Original Information Use the platen glass or document feeder to position originals to copy. Platen Glass Originals Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document feeder, e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded, stapled, tom, or in generally poor condition. CZ Hinr See each description in this manual for copy conditions which cannot use the document feeder to scan. Unsuitable RADF Originals

Curled, creased or Paste-ups or folded originals cut-outs Books n QAU77Y 5 6 SZ r Glossy or transparent originals, OHP film, art paper, cellophane Doubled, punched or Thin or thick originals stapled originals Platen Glass Original Specifications 0 Max. original size: A3, sheet or book 0 Max. book weight/thickness: 6.8 kg / 30 mm 9 Original placement: Face down on left depth side of glass CZ Hinr Detectable paper size can be changed from only A series to Inch series, AB series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by Key Operator. See p. 13-39 to p. 13-46. À cAUTION Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly when thick original is placed and is under pressure of RADF; otherwise the glass may be broken and you may be injured. 11-8

Original Information (continued) RADF Originals Following three modes are provided when using the document feeder (RADF) to scan originals. + Normal mode + Mixed Original mode + Z-Folded Original mode Specifications for each mode are described as follows. CZ Hinr Detectable paper size can be changed from only A series to Inch series, AB series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by Key Operator. See p. 13-39 to p. 13-46. Normal mode © Detectable original size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5, AGR, 11x17", 8.5"x11"R, 8"x13" © Original weight: 50 - 130 g/m? {no special stock) O Max. feeder capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m? paper) O Curling tolerance: 10 mm or less © Original placement: Face up Mixed Original mode Use Mixed Original mode to copy mixed size originals. See p. 8-8 for details. © Original size: Three types of size combination are determined by the RADF guide width. A3 in landscape / A4 in portrait orientation: A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5, A5 mixed B4 in landscape / B5 in portrait orientation: B4, A4R, B5R, B5, A5 mixed A4 in landscape / A5 in portrait orientation: A4R, B5R, A5 mixed © Original weight: 50 - 130 g/m? {no special stock) O Max. feeder capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m? paper) O Curling tolerance: 10 mm or less © Original placement: Face up (see p. 3-8 for details.) 11-9 Original Information graine

Original Information (continued)

Z-Folded Original mode Use Z-Folded Original mode to scan folded originals without using the size detection sensor of the RADF. See p. 8-10 for details. © Detectable original size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5, AGR, 11x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11" 9 Original weight: 50 - 130 g/m? (no special stock) O Max. feeder capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m? paper) O Curling tolerance: 10 mm or less © Original placement: Face up; orientation same as copy paper 11-10

• SECTION Maintenance & Supplies How to Maintain the Copier Adding Toner .… Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-110/210 Finisher 12-5 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-111 Finisher 12-8 Empty Waste Basket of PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching Kit p. 12
• -12 Empty Waste Basket of PZ-108/109 Punching / Z-Folding Unit p. 12
• -14 Cleaning Image Scanning Section p. 12
• -16 Checking Copy Count p. 12
• -18 Copy Materials -20 Adaing Toner Inserting New Stapl Canridge Empty Waste Basket Cieaning Scanning Section Checking Copy Count Copy Materials Maintenance & Supples p. 12

dl Please Be Reminded! Use the toner cartridge of the same number as the number described on the label of a toner access door inner side, otherwise the machine trouble may occur. Add toner according to the procedure as follows.

1. Open the Toner access door.

2. Pull the Toner cartridge holder lever forward and withdraw the

Toner cartridge holder. 12-22

Adding Toner (continued)

Align the rear part of the Toner cartridge with the Toner cartridge holder. 12-3 Adaing Toner Maintenance & Supples

Adding Toner (continued)

7. Return the toner cartridge holder to its original position, then

close the Toner access door securely. ÀN caution Keep the toner cartridge away from children. The toner is non- toxic; however if you inhale or contact with eyes by accident, flush with water and seek medical advice. À cauron Do not throw the empty toner cartridge into a fire. ff it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situa- tion. 12-4

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-110/210 Finisher When the staple cartridge of the Finisher is empty, the Basic Screen dis- plays the following message in the message area. FONCTION Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge.

Q Please Be Reminded! Use only the staples supplied by us. Please contact your service representative to purchase. Open the Finisher door. Pull out the stacker unit by holding the stacker unit handle. 12-5 Adaing Toner Inserting New Stapl Canridge Maintenance & Supples

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-110/210 Finisher (continued

3. Pull up the cartridge housing, then remove it while sliding it along

4. Remove the empty cartridge from the cartridge housing.

5. Insertthe new cartridge into the housing.

Firmly insert the cartridge into the housing while aligning the arrow sides of both case and housing, then remove the lock tape from the cartridge. dl Please Be Reminded! Do not remove the staples remaining inside the housing; otherwise, the first sheet output after the replenishment will not be stapled. 12-6

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-110/210 Finisher (continued)

6. Insertthe cartridge housing while sliding it along the stapler rail,

then push down and in to secure it in place.

7. Return the stacker unit to its original position.

Inserting New Stapl Canridge Maintenance & Supples 12-7

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-111 Finisher When the staple cartridge of the Finisher is empty, the Basic Screen dis- plays the following message in the message area. Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge. Q Please Be Reminded! Use only the staples supplied by us. Please contact your service representative to purchase.

1. Open the Finisher door.

Pull out the stacker unit by holding the stacker unit handle.

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-111 Finisher (continued)

3. Pull up the cartridge housing, then remove it while pulling it for-

4. Open the bottom of the cartridge housing while pressing two

locks on both sides, then remove the empty cartridge from the cartridge housing.

5. Insertthe new cartridge into the housing.

Firmly insert the cartridge into the housing while aligning the arrow indication on the cartridge appears as shown below. Inceing New Stpl Canidge ( Please Be Reminded! Do not remove the staples remaining inside the housing; otherwise, the . first sheet output after the replenishment will not be stapled. ie 12-9

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-111 Finisher (continued)

6. Remove the lock tape from the cartridge, then close the bottom of

8. Return the stacker unitto its original position.

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-111 Finisher (continued)

9. close the Finisher door.

Insering New Staple Cartige Maintenance & Supplies 12-11

Empty Waste Basket of PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching Kit When the waste basket becomes {ull, “Waste basket of Punching kit is full / Please empty waste basket” message will be displayed on the touch screen, and the finished set will be output without being punched even if Punch mode is selected. Follow the procedure below to empty the waste basket.

1. Open the Finisher door.

Empty Waste Basket of PK-110/120/120 Type-A Punching Kit (continued)

3. Empty the waste basket.

4. Return the waste basket to its original position, then close the

Finisher door securely. PK-120/120 Type-A Maintenance & Supplies

Empty Waste Basket of PZ-108/109 Punching / Z- Folding Unit When the waste basket becomes full, “Waste basket of Punching unit is full / Please empty waste basket” message will be displayed on the touch screen, and the finished set will be output without being punched even if Punch mode is selected. Follow the procedure below to empty the waste basket.

1. Open the Punching / Z-Folding unit front door with the Finisher

Empty Waste Basket of PZ-108/109 Punching Î Z-Folding Unit (continued)

3. Empty the waste basket.

4. Return the waste basket to its original position, then close the

Punching / Z-Folding unit front door securely. Maintenance & Supplies 12-15

Cleaning Image Scanning Section In order to maintain optimum copy quality, always keep the following areas clean. Cleaning the Document Glass Raise the document cover, and clean the glass with a clean soft cloth. The glass may also be cleaned with a soft cloth dampened slightly with water, if it is difficult to be cleaned. qi Please Be Reminded! Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the platen glass. Cleaning the Left Partition Glass Keep the glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on the copies. Raise the document cover, and clean the left partition glass with a clean soft cloth. 12-16

Cleaning Image Scanning Section (continued Cleaning the RADF Platen Guide Cover The RADF platen guide cover should be kept clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied or the original size cannot be detected correctly. Raise the document cover, and clean the RADF platen guide cover with a clean soft cloth. (Q Please Be Reminded! Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the RADF platen guide cover. 12-17 Maintenance & Supplies

Checking Copy Count This function allows you to view the current indication of the following items as a list on the touch panel: Total counter, Copier counter, Printer counter, Counter start date. Check the list, then print it from the Counter List Screen, if desired. To Display the Counter List Screen Î1. Press [P (COUNTER)] on the control panel. The Counter List Screen will be displayed. Counter list COUNTICYGLE ÉAU Total counter 12345070 12/12/03 COUNTER Copier counter 12545678 MENU Printer counter 12345676 Scanner counter 12345678

Checking Copy Count (continued) To Print the Counter List Î1. Press [P (COUNTER)] on the control panel. The Counter List Screen will be displayed.

3. Touch the desired tray key to select the copy size.

The Counter list will be printed out, and the Management list mode will be released automatically. Checking Copy Count Copy Materials Maintenance & Supplies 12-19

Copy Materials Maintenance Kit Developer Charging corona plate Charging wire Charging cleaning board Charger slide member Charger cleaning block/Upper Resin ring (D = 2mm) (Charging, transfer/separation corona unit) Charger cleaning block/Lower Toner guide roller Cleaning blade Discharge wire Transfer cleaning assembly Separation cleaning assembly Transfer presser rubber Ozon filter M Ozon filter S Developing suction filter Fixing web unit Fixing claw/Upper Cleaning pad (10 pcs.) Polyethylene gloves Dust bag (rubber band) Developer collection sheet (rubber band) Hand case for collection Cotton swabs (4 pcs.) 12-20 CORRE mn UIO 8 à GO it 4 GO

SECTION Key Operator Mode How to Monitor Copier Activity and Modify Machine Settings How to Access the Key Operator Mode. [1] System Initial Setting [2] Copier Initial Setting. [3] User Setting Mode … [4] E.K.C. (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting … [5] Lock/Delete Job Memory [6] Paper Type / Special Size Set [7] Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment . [8] Key Operator Data Setting…. [9] Weekly Timer. [10] Control Panel Adjustment … [11] Tray Auto Select Setting [12] Power Save Setting [13] Memory Switch Setting [14] Machine Management List Print [15] Call Remote Centre [16] Side 2 Lens Adjustment [17] Finisher Adjustment …… [18] HDD Management Setting …. [19] Scan Transmission Setting …… [20] Non-Image Area Erase Setting. [21] Background Adjustment [22] Timing Adjustment …. [23] Centring Adjustment Key Operator Mode System Initial Seting Copier Initial ‘Seting User Seting Mode EKC. LockDelete Job Memory Paper Type/ Special Size Panel Contrast/ Key Sound Key Operator Data Seting Weekiy. TTimer Control Panel Adjustment Tray Auto Select Seting Power Save Seting Memory Switch Machine Management List Print Call Remote Centre Side 2 Lens Adjusiment Finisher Adjusiment HDD Management Scan Transmission Non-Image Area Erase Background Adjusiment TTiming. Adjusiment Centing Adjusiment

How to Access the Key Operator Mode The Key Operator is trained to handle all special Key Operator functions that are not accessible to the general user, such as monitoring overall copier activity, machine performance, and service information; modifying machine settings; and controlling user activity, for billing purposes. A unique 4-digit Key Operator password is normally set by service at installation. If the unique code is not set by service, the copier will not display Key Operator Password Entry Screen when the Key Operator mode is being accessed, and a Key Operator password will not be required. A service-set 8-digit EKC master key code must be entered by the Key Opera- tor to access the Electronic Key Counter functions, and a service-set 4-digit Weekly Timer master key code must be entered by the Key Operator to access the Weekly Timer functions. To ensure the security of Key Operator mode, it is recommended that you establish a unique Key Operator password, along with the Key Operator EKC master key code and Weekly Timer master key code, and keep them in a confidential file. To Display the Key Operator Mode Screen

3. Usethe keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit Key

Operator password; then touch OK. Enter Key Operator passuord CEE 13-2

How to Access the Key Operator Mode (continued) À FOR DETAILS If an invalid Key Operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. If the Key Operator password is not valid, check with your service representative. ES

4. Make setting changes from the Key Operator Mode Screen,

as described on the following pages. Key operator node menu Select one of, follouing, itens, (0) system initial setting 1 6) Paper tvpe / Special size set Cpie_imitial setting Pare contes Vie) sound ed) User setting mode (8) Key operator dita setting

Lies ab any DEEE Key operator node menu Select one of, follouing, itens, (1) Tray auto select setting {IG Sie 2 1ens edjustnent Pare ame corne Finger aditouent Mencry awiteh setting (18) Ho menagenent setting Macnine moraganone tot prime LS) sean ranamesien setting ii roots cat PA) longe area crane soit Key operator node menu Select one of, follouing, itens, Background adjus tirent iming adjustment Taie cducrnn À FOR DETAILS + To display menus [11] to [23] of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch œ) . To return the menu [1] to [10] of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch (æ) . + The function number [15] Call remote centre on the Key Operator Mode Screen will be dimmed and cannot be selected on the copier without the remote diagnostics activated. + Menus [22] and [23] are not initially provided on the screen. Contact your service representative, if desired.

5. Touch RETURN to exit the Key Operator mode.

The Basic Screen will be restored. 13-3 du

[1] System Initial Setting Set the following initial conditions of the copier. - Date & Time setting: Current date and time, summer time + Language select setting: Language used in LCD (English) + IP address setting: IP address to be accessed from PC

• E-mail address setting: E-mail address to be informed of machine trouble or request for supplies. [1] Date & Time Setting Set the current date and time, the summer time, and also the time differ- ence. 9 Default setting: Summer time off System Initial Setting Menu Screen Date & Time Setting Screen Procedure 1 Touch [1] System initial setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. 2 Touch [1] Date & Time setting to display the Date & Time Setting Screen. 3 Adjust the time. The time that the copier currently has is displayed in the upper line, in the order of date, month, year, and time (in 24-hour expression). (1) Touch SETto move the highlighted section to the number to be changed. (2) Use the keypad on the screen to enter the number. 4 To activate the summer time function, touch Summer time to highlight it. The Present time will gain an hour. 5 The Difference in time setting is provided in order to give the time difference information at the same time when E-mail is received. 13-4

1 System Initial Setting (continued) To set this function, follow the procedure below. (1) Touch Diff. time setting to display the Difference in Time Setting Screen. (2) Touch +--—to display “+” when the local time is earlier than the Universal time, or “—” when the local time is later. (3) Use the keypad on the screen to enter the time difference between the Uni- versal time and the local time in the machine setting area. (e.g. Enter “0900” for 9 hours later than the Universal time.) HE 6 Touch OK to update the Present time by the Setting time and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. 7 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 8 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. . 13-5 Mode

1 System Initial Setting (continued) [2] Language Select Setting Select the language used in the LCD. 9 Default setting: English

CE Er Procedure 1 Touch [1] System initial setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. 2 Touch [2] Language select setting to display the Language Selection Screen. 3 Select the desired language mode. 4 Touch OKio complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 6 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations.

1 System Initial Setting (continued) [3] IP Address Setting When using the server function, this setting is required to enable a PC to gain access to this machine. NOTE: Consult your network manager to perform this setting. incorrect setting may cause a trouble with other network systems. 9 Setting options: IP address; Subnetmask; Gateway address; Line speed System Initial Setting Menu Screen IP Address Setting Screen CHRES EERCS nn] rene] {Line speud satting

Procedure 1 Touch [1] System initial setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. 2 Touch [3] IP address setting to display the IP Address Setting Screen. 3 Make the required setting. Touch to highlight the address key on the left, then enter the address number using the screen keypad. Touch SET to fix the number, or touch RESET to clear. 4 When customizing the line speed, touch Line speed setting to display the Line Speed Setting Screen. Touch the desired key, then touch OK to restore the IP Address Setting Screen. 5 Touch OKio complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. 6 Touch RETURNto restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 7 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-7 Mode

1 System Initial Setting (continued) [4] E-Mail Transmission Setting When the machine requires troubleshooting or maintenance such as paper or toner supply, this setting allows several network PCs to be informed of the current machine status by E-mail. The following information items are provided. + Service call + PM call + Finisher tray full + JAM + Complete job - Dispose of trash basket + Paper supply + Non complete job + Toner supply + Staple cartridge supply NOTE: Consult your network manager to perform this setting. incorrect setting may cause a trouble with other network systems. © Setting options: IP address; E-Mail (machine manager); E-Mail (condition inform), E- Mail transmission item Pa S ET trarmissien Same 1 Touch [1] System initial settingo display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen, then touch [4] E-Mail Transmission Setting to display the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen. IP Address Setting Screen Enter IP ac 2 Touch [1]IP address settingto display the IP Address Setting Screen. Enter the IP address of the mail address in your network using screen keypad, then touch OK'to restore the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen. 3 Touch [2] E-Mail set (machine manager) to display the E-Mail Set (Machine Manager) Screen. Enter the E-mail address of the network manager using screen keypad, then touch OK to restore the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen. 13-8

1] System Initial Setting (continued E-Mail Set (Condition Inform) Screen Touch [3] E-Mail set (condition inform) to display the E-Mail Set (Condition Inform) Screen. Enter the E-mail address of the network PC using screen keypad, then touch OK to restore the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen. Transmission ltem Setting Screen Touch [4] E-Mail transmission item s E set to display the Transmission ltem CE Setting Screen. Touch to highlight the desired item key, then touch OK to restore the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen. Touch RETURN to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations. 13-9

[2] Copier Initial Setting Initial settings are the settings that display automatically when the copier is powered on, when Auto Reset timer is operated, or when [AUTO RESET] key is pressed. These settings can be changed by the Key Operator, as shown in this section. Initially, i.e., at installation, the Basic Screen displays the following condition to meet Energy Star requirements: Initial Setting Copy Mode :1-1 Copy Density : AE Lens Mode :1:1 Paper Tray : APS Output Mode : offset sort When Initial settings are changed by the Key Operator, the new initial settings display when the copier is powered on, when Auto/Reset timer is reached, or when [AUTO RESET] key is pressed. The following initial settings can be changed by the Key Operator: Copy mode Copy density Lens mode Paper tray Output mode Special original Rotation

: [RADPF; 1-1; 1-2; 2-2; 2-1]

:[AË; manual] :[AMS; ratio 0.25-4.00] : [APS; trays 1, 2, 8, 4, or LCT] : [Non-sort; Sort, Group; Staple-sort; Stitch&Fold; Fold; Punch; Z-fold; Three-fold; Cover sheet] : [Original Direction; Duplex Binding; Text/Photo Enhance; Special Original; Original Form] :OFF Setting procedures are described on the following pages. 13-10 NOTE: The most commonly-used settings are established at installation. Before changing any of the copier settings, be sure that you understand the overall and long-range effect of the change.

[2 Copier Initial Setting (continued) Key Operator Mode Screen Procedure Pre Seting 1 Touch [2] Copier Initial setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Copier Initial Setting Screen. 2 Make a selection for each mode as initial settings. Touch RADF to select or deselect it. NOTE: The machine will restore the initial settings specified as above unless the Memory switch No. 4 “JOB memory (30) auto recall” is tunmed ON with the Job memory No. 30 registered. 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. 4 Ifno further changes are required, touch RETURNto restore the Basic Screen LES to perform copying operations. 13-11 Mode

[3] User Setting Mode Set two userset density levels and three USERSETS of magnification. [1] User Density Level 1 Setting Output copying samples from 16 density levels from Lighter to Normal or Normal to Darker, then select the desired exposure and program it as USER1. The programmed copy density can be recalled by selecting USER1 on the Basic Screen. User Setting Mode Menu Screen User Density Level 1 Setting Screen Procedure 1 Touch [3] User setting mode on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the User Setting Mode Menu Screen. 2 Touch [1] User density level 1 setting to display the User Density Level 1 Setting Screen. 3 Place the original on the platen glass or in the RADF. 4 Touch Darker or Lighter to select the density level to be programmed. 5 Touch No.1 1-4, No.2 5-8, No.3 9-12, No.4 13-16, or Set density ##, then press [START]. The density level sample sheet will be output. 6 Select the desired exposure from the sample sheet(s), then enter the density level No. by using the touch screen keypad. 7 Touch OKto complete the setting and return to the User Setting Mode Menu Screen. Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 9 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations.

B User Setting Mode (continued) [2] User Density Level 2 Setting Output copying samples from 16 density levels from Lighter to Normal or Normal to Darker, then select the desired exposure and program it as USER2. The programmed copy density can be recalled by selecting USER2 on the Basic Screen. User Setting Mode Menu Screen Procedure 1 Touch [3] User setting mode on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the User Setting Mode Menu Screen. 2 Touch [2] User density level 2 setting to display the User Density Level 2 Setting Screen. 3 Place the original on the platen glass. 4 Touch Darker or Lighter to select the density level to be programmed. 5 Touch No.1 1-4, No.2 5-8, No.3 9-12, No.4 13-16, or Set density ##, then press [START]. The density level sample sheet will be output. 6 Select the desired exposure from the sample sheet(s), then enter the density level No. by using the touch screen keypad. 7 Touch OKto complete the setting and return to the User Setting Mode Menu Screen. 8 Touch RETURNto restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 9 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-13

B User Setting Mode (continued) [3] User Lens Mode Ratio Setting The preset and userset ratios are used to reduce and enlarge the original image to accommodate copy paper size, and are available on the Basic Screen. NOTE: Normally, users are allowed to change the three USERSETS in the bottom line on the User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen. The preset keys in the top and middle lines can also be programmed in 2-5 DIPSW mode, however, it is recommended not to change them. © Setting options: Userset or Preset ratio 9 Default setting: USERSET1: 4.00 USERSET2: 2.00 USERSET3: 0.50 User Setting Mode Menu Screen User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen

AAA een La Ls Le! Procedure 1 Touch [3] User setting mode on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the User Setting Mode Menu Screen. 2 Touch [3] User lens mode ratio setting to display the User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen. 3 Touch the USERSET you want to change, then enter a ratio from 0.25-4.00, using the keypad. If a ratio under 0.25 is entered, 0.25 will be displayed. If a ratio over 4.00 is entered, 4.00 will be displayed. 4 Touch OKto complete the setting and return to the User Setting Mode Menu Screen. 5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 6 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-14

[4] E.K.C. (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting This function can only be accessed by the Key Operator aîter a 8-digit EKC master key code is entered. The Electronic Key Counter allows you to monitor all copying activity by controlling EKC password accounts. This feature can track copier usage for individual users and/or accounts as well as limit access to the copier to authorized users. Copy quantity limits for specific accounts can also be set. Use the EKC Key Operator Form provided at the end of this section to record EKC password information. The EKC stores up to 1,000 EKC passwords, each of which represents a separate account that can be used for billing and recordkeeping. The number of users assigned to each account may depend upon the billing system in operation and the number of individuals and departments using the copier. When the EKC is activated, copying can be performed only after a valid EKC password is entered. Copy quantity and copy limit for each account can be visually confirmed on the screen. If EKC needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service representative. The following EKC settings can be made: [1] E.K.C. data edit: Change, add, or delete EKC data, and reset the copy count of the individual account. [2] E.K.C. all count reset: Clear the copy count for all accounts. [3] E.K.C. function setting: Turn the EKC function on or off, and set conditions to stop immediately, stop after job is completed or display a warning message when copy limit is reached. 13-15 User Seting Mode EKC.

4] EK.C. {Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued) How to Access the EKC Setting Mode Key Operator Mode Screen EKC Master Key Code Screen Procedure 1 Touch [4] E.K.C. function setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen. The EKC Master Key Code Screen displays, if a code is required. 2 Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch OK to display the EKC Setting Menu Screen. (See note.) 3 Select the desired EKC function, and make settings, as required. To exit the EKC mode, touch RETURN on the EKC Setting Menu Screen. 4 To exit the Key Operator mode, touch RETURN on the Key Operator Mode Screen to restore the Basic Screen. NOTE: If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code. The EKC master key code can be set to less than 8 digits by the Memory switch setting of the Key Operator function. 13-16

4] EK.C. {Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued) [1] E.K.C. Data Edit Use this setting to display the list of copy count and copy limit for each account, to change, add, or delete the EKC data, and to reset the copy count of the individual account. 9 EKC No.: Designated by Key Operator tem Initial 9 EKC Password: Unique 8-digit numeric code programmed by Key Operator for user — 9 User Name: Max. 8 characters © Copy Limit: 0 to 999,999 copies EKC Setting Menu Screen EKC Data Edit Screen Cm nnnnn90000 ES E ace Procedure 1 Touch [4] E.K.C. function setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen. Enter an 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch OK to display the EKC Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code. 2 Touch [1] E.K.C. data edit. The EKC Data Edit Screen will be displayed. 13-17 Mode

4] EK.C. (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued) 3 To change, add, or delete the EKC data, and to reset the copy count of the individual account, follow the procedure for each as described below. To Change EKC Data: (1) Touch 4 or v key on the right side of the list to highlight the EKC data to be changed, then touch Change. The EKC Data Change Screen will be displayed. (2) Touch the desired item key to highlight it, then enter new data by using the touch screen keypad. Password: 8 digits max. (See note 1.) Name: 8 characters max. (See note 2.) Limit: 999,999 copies max. NOTES: 1 We recommend that you make a list of all EKC passwords and account numbers. 2 If an invalid user name is entered, continue by the valid name. (3) Touch OK to complete the setting and to verify whether the same password or name has been already used for another account No. When a password is duplicated: The Password Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch YES to re-enter new password, or NO to create duplicate password. NOTE: If duplicate password is created, the number of copies will be counted only for the EKC password with the smallest number. We recommend you do not use duplicate EKC password. When a name is duplicated': The Name Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch OK to re-enter new name. To Add EKC Data: (1) Touch Addon the EKC Data Edit Screen. The EKC Data Add Screen will be displayed. (2) Touch the desired item key to highlight it, then enter the data by using the touch screen keypad. Password: 8 digits max. (See note 1.) Name: 8 characters max. (See note 2.) Limit: 999,999 copies max. NOTES: 1 We recommend that you make a list of all EKC passwords and account numbers. 2 If an invalid user name is entered, continue by the valid name. (3) Touch OK to complete the setting and to verify whether the same password or name has been already used for another account No. 13-18

4] EK.C. (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued) When a password is duplicated: The Password Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch YES to re-enter new password, or NO to create duplicate password. NOTE: If duplicate password is created, the number of copies will be counted only for the EKC password with the smallest No. We recommend you do not use duplicate EKC password. When a name is duplicated': The Name Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch OK to re-enter new name. To Delete EKC Data: (1) Touch 4 or v key on the right side of the list to highlight the EKC data to be deleted, then touch Delete. The Delete Confirmation Screen will be displayed. (2) Touch YESto delete, or NO to cancel. To Clear EKC Count: (1) Touch A or v key on the right side of the list to highlight the desired EKC data, then touch COUNT RESET. The Reset Confirmation Screen will be displayed. (2) Touch COPY/PRINTER to clear the copy/print count, SCANNER to clear the scan count, or ALL to reset both counters of the selected EKC data. Touch CANCEL to cancel this function. Delete Confirmation Screen Reset Confirmation Screen CEE 1 WE 02 TN 4 lfother EKC setting changes are required, touch RETURN on the EKC Data Edit Screen to return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1-48]. Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 6 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations.

4] EK.C. {Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued) [2] E.K.C. All Count Reset Reset the count for all EKC accounts. EKC Setting Menu Screen EKC All Count Reset Screen ÉRC. settins fèset al E. unts Procedure 1 Touch [4] E.K.C. function setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen. Enter an 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch OK to display the EKC Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code. 2 Touch [2] E.K.C. all count reset The EKC All Count Reset Screen will be displayed. 3 Touch COPY/PRINTER to clear the copy/printer count, SCANNER to clear the scan count, or ALL to reset all counters to zero and to return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen. Touch CANCEL to restore the EKC Setting Menu Screen without resetting counters. Touching RETURN will also cancel this function and return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen. 4 lfother EKC setting changes are required, touch desired key, from [1]-{[3]. Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 6 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations.

4] EK.C. {Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting (continued) [3] E.K.C. Function Setting Use this function to turn EKC On or Off and to select whether the copier/ printer and scanner will stop at the time the count limit is reached, or after the current copy job is completed. EKC Setting Menu Screen EKC Function Setting Screen Procedure 1 Touch [4] E.K.C. function setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen. Enter an 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch OK to display the EKC Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the Tr valid 8-digit code. 2 Touch [3] E.K.C. function setting. The EKC Function Setting Screen will be displayed. 3 Touch EKC On to activate EKC or touch EKC Off to de-activate EKC individu- ally for copier/printer and scanner. The selected key will be highlighted. 4 Touch {immediately to stop the machine at once when the copy limit is reached. In this case, copy conditions selected for the current job will be cleared. To con- tinue the job using the same user password, change the copy limit of the pass- word or clear the copy count. Touch After job to stop the machine after the current job is completed, when copy limit is reached. Touch Warning only to display a warning message when copy limit is reached. The selected key will be highlighted. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen. If other EKC setting changes are required, touch desired key, from [1]-{3]. Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. œœ ou 13-21 Mode

[5] Lock/Delete Job Memory Use this function to lock/unlock or delete a Job that has been programmed. A locked Job is indicated by a lock icon (f) on the Lock/Delete Job Memory Screen. The settings of a locked job cannot be changed. 9 Setting options: Lock Job memory; Unlock Job memory; Delete Job memory 9 Lock/delete is available for all 30 stored jobs 9 Job lock is available only for named jobs 9 A blank key indicates that no job is programmed À xibkeseneeneeer iIndicates that a job is programmed but unnamed Key Operator Mode Screen Lock/Delete Job Memory Screen noSe ven Folle ing_tess Procedure 1 Touch [5] Lock/delete job memory on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Lock/Delete Job Memory Screen. 2 To lock/unlock a job memory; (1) Touch the key on the left side of the desired job number. Use arrow keys to scroll to the desired job number, if required. (2) The lock icon will appear on the touched key to show that the selected job is locked. The previously locked job will be unlocked when selected, and the lock icon on the touched key will disappear. To delete a job memory: (1) Touch the job number you want to delete. Use arrow keys to scroll to the desired job number, if required. (2) Touch DELETE. Selected programs and the name will be deleted from the job memory. 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. 4 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-22

[6] Paper Type / Special Size Set Use this function to indicate a specific paper type or to specify a special paper size for each tray key on the Basic Screen. This is especially useful when special paper is used on a regular basis and is always placed in a specific paper tray. NOTE: The keys to specify the paper size of tray 1, 2, and LOT are notinitially provided on the screen. Contact your service representative, if desired. | Setting Key Operator Mode Screen Paper Type Setting Screen LockDelete Job Memory Paper Type/ Special Size Special Size Setting Screen (Non STD size) Procedure 1 Touch [6] Paper type / Special size seton the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Paper Type Setting Screen. 2 To specify paper type: (1) Touch the desired paper tray key to highlight it. (2) Touch the arrow keys to select paper type. 13-23 Mode

[6] Paper Type Î Special Size Set (continued) To specify special size: (1) Touch Special size setting on the Paper Type Setting Screen to display the Special Size Setting Screen. (2) Touch the desired paper tray to highlighit it. (3) Touch a paper size key to specify a paper size for the selected tray. + Select STD size to allow the machine to automatically detect the size of paper loaded in the tray and indicate it on the tray key. + Select STD size (special) to display the popup menu to show available paper sizes to be specified. Use arrow keys on the popup menu to select the desired size. + Select Non STD size to display the popup menu to enter the paper size by using arrow keys or touch screen keypad. + Select Wide size paper to display the popup menu to show available wide paper sizes to be specified. Use arrow keys on the popup menu to select the desired wide size, then touch Input size to display the popup menu to enter the paper size by using arrow keys or touch screen keypad. Touch Lead edge or Rear edge to select the image starting position. 3 Touch OK on the Paper Type Setting Screen or on the Special Size Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. 4 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-24

[7] Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment Use this feature to adjust the level of brighiness of the touch screen portion of the control panel, and also the volume of the touch key. Key Operator Mode Screen Panel Contrast/ Key Sound Adjustment Screen Procedure exc 1 Touch [7] Panel contrast/Key sound adj. on the Key Operator Mode Screen to LockDelete display the Panel Contrast/ Key Sound Adjustment Screen. _ : A . Paper Type/ 2 Adjust the Panel contrast, Backlight contrast, or Buzzer volume, as desired. Specal re Touch Dimmerto make the panel or backlight contrast dimmer than currently RES displayed, or touch Brighterto make the panel or backlight contrast brighter than currently displayed. D Touch Small or Big to regulate the buzzer volume of the touch keys. Neck Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. 4 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. NOTE: The conirol panel contrast feature can be adjusted from the Help screen. When the Control panel contrast key is pressed, the Contrast adjusitment screen will be displayed.

[8] Key Operator Data Setting Use this screen to enter the name and extension number of the Key Opera- tor indicated on the Help Screen selected from the Basic Screen. 9 Setting options: 5-digit Key Operator telephone extension; Max. 8-character Key Operator name Key Operator Mode Screen Key Operator Data Setting Screen

Procedure 1 Touch [8] Key operator data setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Key Operator Data Setting Screen. 2 Touch Nameto highlight it, then enter the Key Operator name up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad. 3 Touch Key Operator Tel. No. to highlight it, then enter a 5-digit extension number from the touch screen keypad. If the extension number is less than 5 digits, use a hyphen [-] to make it five. The hyphen added in the beginning will be indicated as a space on the Help Screen. 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. 5 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-26

[9] Weekly Timer This function can be accessed only by the Key Operator after a unique 4- digit Weekly Timer master key code is entered. The Weekly Timer is a copier management function that shuts down power to the machine on a daily or hourly basis, and can be programmed specifically for lunch breaks, weekends and holidays, or any time the copier is not required. In Addition, Timer Interrupt can be enabled (with or without a password requirement) to allow temporary use of the machine during periods when power is shut down by the Timer function. Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer: + The power plugis inserted into the socket. + The power switch is turned on. + The current date and time are correctly set. If the Weekly Timer needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service representative. The following Weekly Timer settings can be made. [1] Weekly timer ON/OFF setting Enable and disable the Timer function. [2] Timer Setting Specify the times that the copier will turn ON and OFF for each day of the week or the entire week. [3] Timer action ON/OFF Setting Specify the working days of the machine by the Timer, for all Mondays through Sundays, and/or individually for each day of the given month. [4] Lunch hour off setting Specify the lunch time interval during which the copier will go off and on. [5] Timer interrupt password set Require Password entry for the Timer off function and establish the amount of usage time. NOTES: 1 The time is set in terms of the 24 hour clock, where hour [1] is the first hour after midnight; and hour [24] is the hour of midnight. For example, 6 a.m. is 06:00 hours; 6 p.m. is 18:00 hours. 2 The [AUTO RESET] key is used to change numbers determined by the SET touch key. 13-27 Key Operator Data Seting Weekiy. TTimer Key Operator

e] Weekly Timer {continued) How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode Key Operator Mode Screen Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen Enter seekly timer ra [vue poser tt] EU MEZ HE ME Que

Demos rer mere ue | Procedure 1 Touch [9] Weekly timer on the Key Operator Mode Screen. The Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen displays when the 4-digit Weekly Timer master key code is set by service. Otherwise, the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen displays without the code requirement. 2 lfthe Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen is displayed, use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit Weekly Timer master key code, then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit code. 3 Select the desired Weekly Timer function, and make settings, as required. 4 To exit the Weekly Timer mode, touch RETURN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. 5 Toexitthe Key Operator mode, touch RETURN on the Key Operator Mode Screen to restore the Basic Screen. 13-28

e] Weekly Timer {continued) [1] Weekly Timer On/Off Setting Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Weekly Timer On/Off Setting Screen System Initial Seting Copier Initial Seting Procedure 1 Touch [9] Weekly timer on the Key Operator Mode Screen. Enter your 4-digit EKC Weekly Timer master key code, then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit code. 2 Touch [1] Weekly timer ON/OFF setting to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Setting Screen. 3 Touch Weekly timer On to activate Weekly Timer, or touch Weekly timer Off to de-activate Weekly Timer. The default setting is Weekly timer Off. The selected key will be highlighted. 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. 5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 6 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations.

e] Weekly Timer {continued) [2] Timer Setting Use this function to set the On/Off times in hours and minutes for each day of the week or set the block time for the entire week, i.e., the same On/Off time for each day. Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen SERTEETE Cases CERTES Procedure 1 Touch [9] Weekly timer on the Key Operator Mode Screen. Enter your 4-digit Weekly Timer master key code, then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit code. 2 Touch [2] Timer setting to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen. 3 When the screen is displayed, the ON-time of Monday is always highlighted. Enter a 2-digit ON-hour (ex. 8 a.m. is 08) and a 2-digit ON-minute (ex. 7 min. is

07) using the touch screen keypad, and then touch SET.

Touching SET repeatedly will shift the input section from Monday ON, Monday OFF, Tuesday ON, Tuesday OFF e.g. NOTES: +_ If ON-time and OFF-time are the same, power will not go on. +_Ifthe setting is 00:00-00:00, you will not be able to set the copiers off/ on condition for specific days. When setting Sunday OFF-time, Monday ON-time is highlighted again. Proceed to step 5. 4 To set the ON/OFF time collectively for more than one day of the week, touch Block set to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Block Setting Screen. 13-30

e] Weekly Timer (continued) 5 When you open this screen, the ON and OFF times are always set at 00:00--00:00. Touch to highlight the day(s) of the week to be set. More than one can be selected at a time. Enter the ON-time and OFF-time using the touch screen keypad, and then touch SET after each entry. 6 Touch OK on the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen or on the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Block Setting Screen to complete the setting, and return to ! the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. 7 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 8 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen ! to perform copying operations. 13-31 Ê Mode

e] Weekly Timer {continued) [3] Timer Action On/Off Setting Use this function to set the On/Off condition of the copier for a given month. Set the On-Off condition for specific days; or collectively, for all Mondays through Sundays of the given month. The default setting is collective: On for Mondays through Saturdays, and Off for Sundays. Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Procedure 1 Touch [9] Weekly timer on the Key Operator Mode Screen. Enter your 4-digit Weekly Timer master key code, then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit code. 2 Touch [3] Timer action ON/OFF setting to display the Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen. The days of the current month are displayed on the left half of the screen, with timer-active days highlighted. 3 To activate or deactivate the Timer for any individual day, touch the key for that day to change its indication. To change the month, use arrows to scroll to the desired month. 4 To collectively set the on/off data for the entire month by the day of the week, touch the ON or OFF key for the desired day on the right half of the screen. If you touch an already-highlighted key, no change will occur. 5 lf any change is made in the collective setting area, the Timer Action Change Confirmation Screen will be displayed. Touch YES to change the timer action, or touch NO to cancel. The Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen will be restored. 13-32

e] Weekly Timer {continued) 6 Touch OK on the Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. 7 Touch RETURN(to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 8 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-33 Mode

e] Weekly Timer {continued) [4] Lunch Hour Off Setting The Weekly Timer function turns the copier ON and OFF once a day. Use this Lunch hour off function to shut down power for lunch break then turn on again while the copier is turned on due to the Weekly Timer function. The only one off time interval can be programmed. Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Lunci Lune

Hour Off Setting Screen FF Funetlon mn | Cl] Lol] Procedure 1 Touch [9] Weekly timer on the Key Operator Mode Screen. Enter your 4-digit Weekly Timer master key code, then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit code. 2 Touch [4] Lunch hour off setting to display the Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen. 3 Touch Function Valid to activate the Lunch hour off function. Set OFF-time and Restart-time using the touch screen keypad, and then touch SET after each entry. 4 Touch Function Invalid to de-activate the Lunch hour off function. The time setting area will appear grayed out and cannot be selected. The Function Invalid setting is the factory default setting. 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. 6 Touch RETURNto restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 7 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-34

e] Weekly Timer {continued) [5] Timer Interrupt Password Setting Use this password setting mode to establish a 4-digit password requirement for using Timer Interrupt function. The default password of 0000 allows the timer function to be interrupted without the requirement for password entry. Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Timer Interrupt Password Setting Screen

Procedure 1 Touch [9] Weekly timer on the Key Operator Mode Screen. Enter your 4-digit Weekly Timer master key code, then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit code. 2 Touch [5] Timer interrupt password setto display the Timer Interrupt Password Setting Screen. 3 Use the touch screen keypad to enter a 4-digit password, and then touch OKto complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: When the password setting is 0000, timer interrupt can be used simply by turning the copier OFF, then ON. In this case, you will be asked to enter the duration of use (a period of time to turn the copier power on). 4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 5 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-35 Mode

[10] Control Panel Adjustment Use this feature to check the malfunction of the LCD touch screen due to the shift in position of the touch sensor. Key Operator Mode Screen Control Panel Adjustment Screen Procedure 1 Touch [10] Control panel adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Control Panel Adjustment Screen. 2 Touchihe “+ indication at the upper right corner, then lower left corner on the screen. The present coordinates will be displayed in the message area of the screen. NOTE: When touching the “+” indications, it is recommended that you use a sharp point such as a pencil to be much more accurate. 3 Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line of the message area fall within the standard value displayed in the second line. 4 Touch the CHECK BUTTONSs at the upper left and lower right corners on the screen to check if the buzzer tone functions normally. 5 lfthe coordinates fall out of the range of the standard value in step 3, orthe buzzer tone does not sound in step 4, repeat the adjustment procedure from 2 to 4. 6 Press [7] to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 7 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-36

[11] Tray Auto Select Setting Select to be detected or not to be detected, and priority of detection for each tray when ATS/APS functions. Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 e + Procedure neck 1 Touch [11] Tray auto select setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to (Control Panel display the Tray Auto Select Setting Screen. ‘Adiuslment Tray Auto 2 On the left half of the screen, touch to highlight each tray key, then select OFF Sel Seting or ON to specify whether the selected tray is to be automatically detected or not . when ATS/APS functions. 3 Tray keys specified as ATS/APS ON will appear on the right half of the screen. Touch to highlight the desired tray key, then change its priority by using Up (4) and Down (Y) arrow keys. 4 Touch OKto complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 5 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-37 Mode

[12] Power Save Setting Select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off become activated. Auto Shut Off conserves more energy than Auto Low Power. The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto Shut Off setting. Power Save Setting Screen Procedure

Touch [12] Power save setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Power Save Setting Screen. The periods of time currently selected for each power save function are located on the Timer Setting Screen below the Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off indicators. Touch the arrow keys (A) and (Y) in each area to select a specific waiting period before activating the Auto Low Power or Auto Shut Off. NOTES: 1 The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto Shut Off setting. 2 If the same period of time as Auto Shut Off is selected for Auto Low Power, the Auto Shut Off will function instead of Auto Low Power. Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode screen. If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-38

[13] Memory Switch Setting This function allows you to change the Memory Settings listed below. See pp. 13-

41 - 13-46 for details on Memory Settings.

SW No. Item Setting (default is underlined) No. 01: Auto reset timer OFF / 30 sec. / 60 sec. / 90 sec. / 120 sec./ 150 sec. / 180 sec. / 210 sec. / 240 sec. / 270 sec. / 300 sec. No. 02: AUTO RESET key function Full-Auto / Initial Setting No. 03: RADF-Original effect RADF+AUTO RESET key selected/ RADF selected No. 04: Job memory auto recall (30) OFF / ON No. 05: Finisher mode by Full-auto Face down (Sub tray) / Non-sort / Sort / Staple sort / Stitch&Fold / Fold / Face up (Sub tray) No. 06: Initial by Key counter insert OFF /ON No. 07: Erasure outside area of orig. Erased for except Platen (1:1) / Area outside of orig. erased / Erased for APS/AMS only No. 08: RADF frame erasure selection None / 1mm frame / 2mm frame / 3ämm_ frame / 4mm frame / 5mm frame No. 09: Automatic tray switching OFF / ON : OFF /ON : OFF /ON No. 12: Platen AMS OFF /ON No. 13: RADF AMS OFF /ON No. 14: Select tray when APS cancel APS preferential tray / Tray 1 / Tray 2 / Tray 3 / LCT / Bypass tray No. 15: Platen original size detect Only A series / Full size / AB series / Inch series No. 16: RADF original size detect Only A series / Full size / AB series / Inch series No. 17: Platen orig. size detect (SMALL) AG5R /B6R / 5.5"x8.5"R / B5 / A4 / 8.5"x11"/ A6R No. 18: Rotation ON-APS/AMS only / ON-APS/AMS/Reduce only / ON-Always No. 19: Staple mode reset-function OFF / ON No. 20: Job offset operating OFF / ON No. 21: Continuation print OFF / ON No. 22: Key click sound OFF / ON No. 23: 1 SHOT indication time 8 seconds / 5 seconds No. 24: Power save screen Shut off mode / Low power mode No. 25: START key latch function OFF / ON 13-39 Power Save Seting Memory Switch Key Operator

13 Memory Switch Setting (continued) No. 26: STOP key function JOB momentary stop / JOB cancel No. 27: Auto select of Booklet copy Automatic selection / Non Automatic selection No. 28: E.K.C. password under 8 digits / 8 digits No. 29: Arrow key change <image Shift> Decimal point off (1 STEP 1mm) / (1 STEP 0.1mm) No. 30: Exit direction of 1 sheet Face up / Face down No. 31: An interruption suspended way Division of a number of copies / During of a number of copies No. 32: E.K.C. password input timing Auto reset timer / Complete job No. 33: Key click sound (No paper/JAM) OFF / 3 seconds / 5 seconds / 10 seconds No. 34: Reserve copy function Reserve copy by folder select / Reserve copy by original set No. 35: Scan stop by a pull out tray ON/OFF No. 36: Change page no. pos. (booklet) OFF / ON (Outside page numbering) No. 37: Timer which prohibits Print OFF / 15 seconds / 30 seconds / 60 seconds / 90 seconds No. 38: Bookmark function ON (It is cancel every JOB) / ON (It is not cancel every JOB) / OFF No. 39: Delete of overlay image Permission (Delete/Overwrite) / Prohibition {Delete/Overwrite) No. 40: Orig. direction/binding mode Cancel every JOB / Not cancel every JOB No. 41: Image stored cont. (SRV) OFF / ON No. 42: Image recalled cont. (SRV) OFF / ON No. 43: Exit direction Face down / Face up No. 44: I/P SCAN Address manual input Permission/ Prohibition No. 45: 1/P SCAN E-Mail function mask No mask/ Mask No. 46: 1/P SCAN HDD function mask No mask/ Mask No. 47: IP SCAN FTP function mask No mask/ Mask No. 48: State of Platen/RADF (Reset) Not keep/ Keep No. 49: Priority tray (blank overlap) Printer tray/ PI tray No. 50: Auto Select the binding mode OFF/ ON No. 51: IP SCAN E-Mail file form PDF/ PACKAGE TIFF No. 52: IP SCAN HDD file form PDF/ PACKAGE TIFF/ DIVISION TIFF No. 53: IP SCAN FTP file form PDF/ PACKAGE TIFF No. 54: Printing side <Three-Fold> OUTSIDE/ INSIDE 13-40

13 Memory Switch Setting (continued) Key Operator Mode Screen Memory Switch Setting Screen Pre mem Procedure 1 Touch [13] Memory switch setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Memory Switch Setting Screen. 2 Use the procedure below to select the desired item and change the setting. (1) Touch the arrow keys A and Y at the right on the Memory Switch Setting Screen to select the desired item. (2) Touch the arrow keys æ and æ at the lower left to scroll the screen. (3) Touch Change Setting Contents to change the setting of the highlighted item. (4) Repeat above steps (1) to (3) to make several changes in succession. 3 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 4 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. The following functions can be provided by the Memory switch settings. [1] Auto reset timer Set the reset interval starting from the completion of a copying job until the machine pere returns to the initial condition. [2] AUTO RESET key function Set the condition of the following modes when [AUTO RESET] is pressed; Copy mode, Copy density, Magnification, Tray selection. [3] RADF-Original effect Set the machine condition when original is set on RADF in non-RADF mode with RADF unit closed. [4] Job memory auto recall (30) Job memory No. 30 is automatically recalled when power is turned on or when Auto Reset is restored. This job recall function works only when Job No. 30 is registered. [5] Finisher mode by AUTO RESET Set the Finisher mode to be recalled when [AUTO RESET] is pressed. 13-41 Ê Mode

13 Memory Switch Setting (continued) [6] Initial by Key counter insert Set the machine to return to the initial state when Key counter is inserted. [7] Erasure outside area of original Set the machine to delete the outside area of original. [8] RADF frame erasure selection Set Frame erasure to function anytime in RADF mode. [9] Automatic tray switching When paper is depleted during a copying job, the copier continues copying by switching to another tray that contains the same size paper. [10] Platen APS The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on the platen glass. (In reduction or enlargement mode, an appropriate paper size is selected according to the ratio selected.) [11] RADF APS The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on the RADF. (In reduction/enlargement mode, an appropriate paper size is selected according to the ratio.) [12] Platen AMS The copier detects the size of the platen original and selects the appropriate magnification ratio to correspond to the selected paper size. [13] RADF AMS After detecting the original size placed on the RADF the copier automatically selects an appropriate ratio for the copy when copy size is selected manually. [14] Select tray when APS cancel Select the tray to be automatically selected when APS is released. [15] Platen original size detect Select the series of the original paper size detected from the platen glass. [16] RADF original size detect Select the series of the original paper size detected from the RADF. 13-42

13 Memory Switch Setting (continued) [17] Platen orig. size detect (SMALL) Select the minimum original paper size detected from the platen glass. [18] Rotation Select to activate, activate the Rotation only when the APS/AMS functions, or activate the Rotation only when the APS/AMS/reduce functions. [19] Staple mode reset-function Staple mode is automatically canceled after a job is completed with Staple sort mode ON. (Sort mode is selected.) [20] Job offset operating Set the copier to offset the copies of different jobs. [21] Continuation print Set the copier to output multiple reserve jobs in succession. [22] Key click sound Activate or deactivate the sound each time a key is pressed on the touch panel . [23] 1 SHOT indication time Select the SHOT indication time function. [24] Power save screen Select the screen to display when pressing the [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] key. [25] START key latch function Activate or deactivate the latch function. [26] STOP key function Select to display or not to display the confirmation message when [STOP] key is pressed. [27] Auto select of Booklet copy Set the copier with FS-210 mounted to automatically select the Booklet mode when Stitch&Fold or Fold output mode is selected. [28] E.K.C. password Select the acceptable number of digits for the EKC master key code. 13-43 Memory Switch Key Operator

13 Memory Switch Setting (continued) [29] Arrow key change (Image Shift) Select the 1 step unit of the touch key to specify the shift amount in Image shift. [30] Exit direction of 1 sheet Select to exit face up or face down when making only 1 sheet of copy. [31] An interruption suspended way Select the timing to stop the job in progress when [INTERRUPT] is pressed. [32] E.K.C. password input timing Set the input timing for the EKC password. [33] Key click sound (No paper/JAM) Select the duration of the buzzer for alerting that the machine has stopped being out of paper or due to paper misfeed. [34] Reserve copy function Set the selection for the reserve job setting. [35] Scan stop by a pull out tray Select to stop or continue the scanning job when a tray is pulled out. [36] Change page no. pos. (booklet) Set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in Stamp. [37] Timer which prohibits Printer Set the timer to allow the printing job after operating the copying job. [38] Bookmark function Select to set the Bookmark function only for the current job, set for all the following jobs, or deactivate the function. [39] Delete of overlay image In Overlay Memory setting, select to permit or prohibit deleting the selected image data previously stored in HDD, and also overwriting the data of the same name when storing new data in HDD. 13-44

13 Memory Switch Setting (continued) [40] Orig. direction/binding mode Select to reset or save the original direction and bind position settings made on the Special Original popup menu and Output Mode popup menu after completion of each copying job. [41] Image stored cont. (SRV) When storing the image data in HDD/PC in scanner/server mode, select to release or continue the scanner/server mode after completion of each image data storing job. [42] Image recalled cont. (SRV) When recalling the image data stored in HDD/PC in scanner/server mode, select to recall only one job or to continue recalling jobs. [43] Exit direction Select to exit face up or face down when making single-sided copies in non-sort or sort mode using finisher primary (main) tray. [44] 1/P SCAN Address manual input Select to permit or prohibit entering the IP address manually to transmit the scanned image data. [45] /P SCAN E-Mail function mask Select to mask or unmask the function to send the scanned image data by e-mail. [46] /P SCAN HDD function mask Select to mask or unmask the function to store the scanned image data in the HDD. [47] /P SCAN FTP function mask Select to mask or unmask the function to store the scanned image data in the FTP server. [48] State of Platen/RADF (Reset) When Auto Reset functions, select to reset the Platen/RADF mode to the initial set- ting, or save the previous setting. [49] Priority tray (blank overlap) When setting Cover with Blank sheet mode in Booklet and both printer tray and upper/lower tray of the cover sheet feeder are selected, select the tray to have pri- ority in feeding the blank cover sheet. 13-45 Memory Switch Key Operator

13 Memory Switch Setting (continued) [50] Auto Select the binding mode Set the machine to conform the binding direction of the originals and printed sets each other. [51] IP SCAN E-Mail file form Select the file form when transmitting the scanned image data. [52] IP SCAN HDD file form Select the file form when storing the scanned image data in the HDD. [53] IP SCAN FTP file form Select the file form when storing the scanned image data in the FTP server. [54] Printing side <Three-Fold> Select the printed side when using Three-Folding mode. 13-46

[14] Machine Management List Print Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items. + Job memory list: Programmed contents of Job memory + User management list: Home position settings selected by user + E.K.C. management list: Machine informations managed by EKC + Font pattern list: Font patterns used in the machine Management List Print Menu Screen Key Operator Mode Screen Procedure 1 Touch [14] Machine management list print on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Management List Print Menu Screen. 2 Touchithe desired item on the screen. The Basic Screen will resume | automatically. Weeki 3 Press [START] to start printing the selected list. To suspend printing, press [STOP]. Press [P] and [C] in order to return to the Management List Print Menu Screen. 4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. Power Sa 5 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. Er Machine Management List Print Call Remo! 13-47 Mode

[15] Call Remote Centre When activated, the Remote Diagnostics option is automatically monitored by a Konica service representative. In case of machine trouble, select the Call Remote Centre option. Your service representative will contact you to determine the appropriate means for resolving the problem. 9 Setting options: Call for JAM concerns; Call for SC concerns; Toner bottle supply call; Paper supply call; Call for image quality; Call for others tor Mode Screen Call Remote Service Centre Screen (15) 00 mnogment DEX

SORT Start Call Screen Procedure 1 Touch [15] Call remote centre on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Call Remote Service Centre Screen. 2 Touch [1] Call for JAM concerns; [2] Call for SC concerns; [3] Toner bottle supply call; [4] Paper supply call; [5] Call for Image quality; or [6] Call for others. The Start Call Screen will be displayed. 3 Touch Start to call. Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 5 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations.

[16] Side 2 Lens Adjustment Use this function to set the adjustment data of the magnification ratio for each tray as Side 2. Key Operator Mode Screen Side 2 Lens Adjustment Screen Procedure Exe 1 Touch [16] Side 2 lens adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Side 2 Lens Adjustment Screen. 2 Touch to highlight the desired tray key, then touch arrow keys to select an adjustment data. The selected data will be displayed on the highlighted tray key. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. 4 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations.

Side 2 Lens Adjustment 13-49 Mode

[17] Finisher Adjustment Use this mode to make fine adjustments to each function of the finisher. Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen Key Operator Mode Screen [11] roy auto select setting LS) side 2 1ens oojustment Stiteh & Fold stopper dj Pons save setting ï = old stopper ojustment Henry omiteh setting izontal Position Adjustment Screen Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment Screen Z Ve 13-50

[17] Finisher Adjustment (continued) 1stZ-Fold Position Adjustment Screen 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment Screen 5 FI # Foi System Initial Seting Three-Fold Position Adjustment Screen 2 Positions Staple Pitch Adjustment Screen Procedure 1 Touch [17] Finisher adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen. 2 Touchihe desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function. 3 Make fine adjustment on the screen. To go on or back to another adjustment screen, touch NEXT or BACK. Touching RETURN restores the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen. 4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 5 Ifno further changes are required, touch RETURNto restore the Basic Screen ie to perform copying operations. Switch Machine Management

Finisher Adjusiment HDD Management Transmission Centring Adjustment 13-51 Mode

[18] HDD Management Setting Use this function to manage the image data stored in the optional HDD (HD-105) and to check the space available for new data. + Password list/delete: Display the password list on the screen, or delete the image data (JOB) by deleting the corresponding password from the list. + JOB auto delete period setting: Specify the period of time (1 to 52 weeks) to keep each data so that it will be deleted automatically when specified period has passed. + State of HDD capacity: Check the space in percentage. Key Operator Mode Screen HDD Management Password Entry Screen Enter HI a HDD Management Setting Menu Screen #00 sen Password List/Delete Screen de ins CRETE Li spce ares 13-52

[8 HDD Management Setting (continued) Procedure 1 Touch [18] HDD management setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen. The HDD Management Password Entry Screen will be displayed when the 4-digit HDD management password is set by service representative. Otherwise, the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen displays without the password requirement. If the HDD Management Password Entry Screen is displayed, use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit HDD management password; then touch OK to display the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen. NOTE: The HDD management password is not initially set. Contact your ser- vice representative, if desired. 2 Touch the desired menu key to display the subsequent screen for each function. To view the password list or delete the password and the corresponding image data: (1) Touch [1] Password list/delete to display the Password List/Delete Screen. (2) Touch to highlight the password key to be deleted, then touch DELETE. The popup menu will appear for confirmation. (3) Touch YESto delete the selected password and all the data corresponding to it; or touch NO to cancel. (4) Touch RETURN to return to the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen. To delete the password and data automatically: (1) Touch [2] JOB auto delete period setting'to display the Job Auto Delete Period Setting Screen. (2) Touch Auto delete ONto highlight it, then enter the number of weeks to keep each data, using the touch screen keypad. The maximum period of time is 52 weeks. (3) Touch OK to complete the setting. To check the current state of HDD capacity: (1) Touch [3] State of HDD capacity to display the State of HDD Capacity Screen. The bar chart on the screen shows the current state of HDD capacity. (2) Touch RETURNto return to the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen. 3 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 4 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-53 HDD Management Key Operator

[19] Scan Transmission Setting Use this function to change or delete the address registered for transmitting the image data scanned on the machine. The following three address types can be registered. + E-mail + HDD (box No.) + FTP (FTP server address) NOTE: The [19] Scan Transmission Setting key will function only when 1P-511 Type-A Printer Controller is installed on the machine. Mode Screen Scan Transmission Setting Screen (E-Mail) me del Change Box No. Screen Plesse enter tn Procedure 1 Touch [19] Scan transmission setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Scan Transmission Setting Screen. 13-54

19] Scan Transmission Setting (continued) 2 Select the desired address type. Touch E-Mail, HDD, or FTP to display the registered name keys on each page. NOTE: Scan Transmission Setting Screen (E-Mail) is provided with the GROUP key. Touch the key to change the group name, if desired. 3 Select the name key to be changed or deleted. Touch the # Lower arrow key to scroll, or æ Upper arrow key to return. To delete the address: Touch to highlight the desired name key, then touch DELETE. The selected key will be deleted from the screen. To change the address: (1) Touch to highlight the desired name key, then touch CHANGE. The subsequent screen according to the address type will be displayed. (See previous page.) (2) Touch to highlight the registered item key on the left, then change the information under that key using the alphabet keys on the screen. (3) Touch OK on each screen to complete the setting and restore the Scan Transmission Setting Screen. 4 Touch OK io restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 5 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. Scan Transmission 13-55 Ê Mode

[20] Non-Image Area Erase Setting Select the mode of Non-Image Area Erase function to be in effect when this feature is selected on the Application Selection Screen after power is turned on or after Auto Reset occurs. Key Operator Mode Screen Non-Image Area Erase Setting Screen FRE PE, FIGIMA (EN, 1 =

iique arose M hectongie ce MO oc Procedure 1 Touch [20] Non-image area erase setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Non-Image Area Erase Setting Screen. 2 Select the desired erase mode and original density level. Touch AUTO to let the machine select the erase mode and density level automatically. To specify the erase mode manually, touch Oblique erase or Rectangle erase, as desired, then select the density level required. Five exposure levels are provided. NOTE: Select AUTO mode if the specified Oblique or Rectangle Erase mode does not function properly due to the type of set original. 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 4 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-56

[21] Background Adjustment Use this function to specify the density level against the background in each of four enhance modes (AUTO, Increase Contrast, Photo, Text). NORMAL (standard) is initially selected. Key O| Mode Screen Background Adjustment Screen System Initial Seting Copier Initial Seting Procedure 1 Touch [21] Background Adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Background Adjustment Screen. 2 Select the desired density level for each enhance mode. Touch an enhance mode key to display the popup menu, then touch the desired level key to highlight it. Nine density levels are provided for each mode except Increase Contrast which is provided with five levels from NORMAL to +4. 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 4 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. ‘Transmission Non-Image Area Erase Background Adjustment 13-57 Mode

[221 Timing Adjustment Use this mode to make fine adjustments of the timing for printing or scanning function. + Printer restart timing adj.: adjusts the lead edge timing. + Printer regist loop adj.: adjusts the paper loop amount in the registration roller section. + Printer pre-regist adj.: adjusts the paper loop amount in each tray and ADU pre-registration roller section.

• Printer lead edge timing adj.: conducts a leading edge erasure amount adjustment. + Scanner (Platen) restart timing adj.: adjusts lead edge timing for original scanning. + RADF restart timing adj.: adjusts lead edge timing of RADF. + RADF regist loop adj.: adjusis the original loop amount in the RADF registration roller section. Key Operator Mode Screen Timing Adjustment Menu Screen Enckgreund adjustment Timing agjustment (22) convrino ojustaent re reist ocjustment

inter 1290 22e timing ed) Printer Restart Timing Adjustment Screen Printer Registration Loop Adjustment Screen

[22 Timing Adjustment (continued) RADF Registration Loop Adjustment Screen REG Rae Seting Copier Initial Seting Procedure — 1 Touch [22] Timing adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Timing Adjustment Menu Screen. E 2 Touchihe desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function. 3 Make fine adjustment on the screen. To go on or back to another adjustment screen, touch NEXT or BACK. Touching RETURN restores the Timing Adjustment Menu Screen. 4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 5 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. TTiming. Adjusiment Centing Adjusiment 13-59 Pie

[23] Centring Adjustment Use this mode to make various adjustments concerning the image centring function. + Printer centring adjustment: adjusts the mis-centring of images vertical to paper feed direction. + Scanner centring adjustment: adjusts the centring when scanning the platen original. + RADF centring adjustment: adjusts the centring when scanning the RADF original. Key O| tor Mode Screen

Procedure 1 Touch [23] Centring adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Centring Adjustment Menu Screen. 2 Touchihe desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function. 3 Make fine adjustment on the screen. To go on or back to another adjustment screen, touch NEXT or BACK. Touching RETURN restores the Centring Adjustment Menu Screen. 4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 5 lfno further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations. 13-60

C (CLEAR QTY.) key 3-6 Call for Service Screen 5-2 "Call for Service" message" 5-2 Call Remote Centre 13-48 Cartridge housing 2-9 CAUTION 1-6 Caution Indicator 1-3 Caution label 1-2 Centring Adjustment 13-60 Change page no. pos. (booklet) 13-40 Changing Paper Size 2-34

CHECK key 3-55 Check Mode 3-55 Checking Copy Count 12-18 Cleaning image scanning section 12-16 Combination 9-10 Continuation print 13-39 Control Panel 2-15 Control Panel Adjustment 13-36 Conveyance/Fixing unit 2-5 Copier Initial Setting 13-10 Copy Limit 13-17 Copy Materials 12-20 Counter List Screen 12-18 Cover Sheet Feeding 7-20

Exit direction of 1 sheet 13-40 Extension Lead 1-8

Finisher Adjustment 13-50 Finisher door 2-8 Finisher mode by AUTO RESET 13-41 Fixed magnification mode (RE) 3-15 Fixing unit 2-5 Fold mode 7-9 Font pattern list 13-47 Frame/Fold Erasure 9-39 FREE JOB key 3-35 Front door 2-3 FS-110/FS-210 Finisher 2-8 FTP server address 13-54 Full-Image Area 9-44

Gateway address 13-7 Guide width for mixed originals 11-9

Language Select Setting 13-6 LCD touch screen 2-8, 2-15 Left partition glass 12-16 Lens Mode 3-14 Limited use of the copier 5-3 Line speed setting 13-7 Loading Paper 2-24 Loading Tabbed Sheets 2-31 Lock Job icon 13-22 Lock/Delete Job Memory 13-22 Low Power Mode 2-22 LT-402/412 Large Capacity Tray 2-7 Lunch Hour Off Setting 13-34 Machine Management List Print 13-47 Machine setting file 10-53 Main power switch 2-3 Maintenance Kit 12-20 Manual punch 7-24 Manual staple 7-24

Index (continued) Manual stitch & fold mode 7-25 Manual three-fold mode 7-24 "Memory Full" message 5-11 Memory Overilow 5-11 Memory Switch Setting 13-39 Mishandled paper 5-6 Mixed Original 8-8 MODE key 10-4 Multi-sheet bypass tray 3-29

Non-Image Area Erase 9-29 Non-Image Area Erase Setting 13-56 Non-standard size original 8-12 NORMAL key 3-18 [e) OHP Interleave 9-17 Orig. direction/binding mode 13-40 Original binding direction 8-4 Original direction 8-2 Original Form 8-12 Original Information 11-8 Output Mode with Finisher 3-44 Output Mode with Shift Tray 3-50 Output Mode without Finisher 3-41 Overlay 9-61 Overlay Memory 9-64

P (COUNTER) key 5-4, 12-18 P (counter) key 2-15 Page space function 9-46 Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment 13-25 Paper indicator 2-24 Paper Information 11-2 Paper jam position display 5-6 Paper size 3-10 Paper size for trays and equipments 11-5 Paper Type / Special Size Set 13-23 PAPER TYPE/SIZE key 3-29 Paper Weight 11-2 Periodic Check 1-13 Photo mode (Enhance) 8-6 PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder 2-12 PK-110/120 Punching Kit 2-9 Platen AMS 13-39 Platen APS 13-39 Platen glass originals 11-8 Platen orig. size detect (SMALL) 13-39 Platen store mode 3-33 Plug Socket 1-7 PM CALL icon 5-4 PM counter 5-4 Positioning Mixed Originals 3-3 Positioning Originals 3-2 Positioning Originals on Platen Glass 3-5 Positioning Z-Folded Originals 3-4 Power cord 1-7 Power Lead 1-7 Power OFF/ON Screen 5-13 Power Plug 1-7 Power save screen 13-39 Power Save Setting 13-38 POWER SAVER ON/OFF key 2-15, 7-2 Power Source 1-7 Power switch 2-3 Precautions 1-12 PRE-JOB RECALL key 3-54 Preventive Maintenance 5-4 Previous job setting 3-54 Primary (Main) tray 2-8 Printing side 13-40 Priority tray (blank overlap) 13-40 Program Job 9-26 Proof Copy 3-55 PROOF COPY key 3-57 Punch mode 7-12 PZ-108 Punching / Z-Folding Unit 2-13

Recycled paper is used for the inside pages of this manual. MANUFACTURER